Tag: financial freedom

  • Don’t Blame Your Income if You Are a Lawyer in Debt

    Don’t Blame Your Income if You Are a Lawyer in Debt

    If you’re a lawyer, you make plenty of money.

    It doesn’t matter if you’re in big law or working in the public sector.

    And, if you’re a lawyer in debt, your income is not the reason why.

    I know lawyers who make a lot of money and are in a lot of debt. I also know lawyers who make modest salaries and have no debt.

    Income is not the problem.

    The problem is what you are doing with that income.

    You may tell yourself that more income would solve all your debt problems, but it won’t.

    Not unless you understand how you got into debt in the first place and are ready to do something about it.

    Today, we’ll look at my three theories why lawyers end up in debt.

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    Let’s change those poor financial habits. #thinkandtalkmoney #badhabits #financialfreedom #financialliteracy

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    Looking at each of these explanations can help us understand and avoid common pitfalls that lead us into debt.

    Of course, it’s expected that young lawyers will have student loan debt. While student loan debt may be considered good debt, the problem is that it can spiral into other forms of bad debt.

    For example, student loan debt becomes the excuse for why we fall into consumer debt:

    “I have to pay my loans this month, but I also want to eat out with my friends. I’ll just use my credit card.”

    This is exactly what happened to me at the beginning of my career as a lawyer, and what I want to help you avoid.

    If you fall into bad habits early, the problems only magnify when your income rises and your potential to spend rises.

    The key is to eliminate the bad habits before they become bad habits. If it’s too late for that, now is the best time to correct those bad habits before the situation spirals.

    Before we get to my theories why lawyers are in debt, realize that you’re not alone if you are a lawyer in debt.

    Unfortunately, the data shows that debt is all too common in today’s world. Let’s begin with some scary stats about debt.

    Here are some scary stats to help explain why lawyers are in debt.

    According to the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, total household debt in the United States grew to $18.04 trillion by the end of 2024.

    That’s such a big number, it’s hard to know what to do with that information.

    Let’s break it down by the type of debt:

    • Credit card balances increased by $45 billion from the previous quarter and reached $1.21 trillion at the end of December 2024.
    • Auto loan balances increased by $11 billion to $1.66 trillion. 
    • Mortgage balances also increased by $11 billion and reached $12.61 trillion. 
    • HELOC balances increased by $9 billion to $396 billion.
    • Other balances, reflecting retail cards and other consumer loans, increased by $8 billion. 
    • Student loan balances increased by $9 billion to reach $1.62 trillion.

    While these numbers are still too big to comprehend, one powerful conclusion is hard to miss:

    In every category, the amount of debt increased from the previous quarter.

    This pattern of increasing consumer debt has been consistent for some time now.

    HELOC balances have increased for eleven consecutive quarters.

    Credit card balances have increased or remained the same for 10 of the last 11 quarters.

    Let’s look closer at credit card debt for a moment. 

    According to a recent survey looking at credit card debt in 2024 by Bankrate.com:

    • 48% of credit card holders carry a debt balance, an increaseof 9% since 2021.
    • 53% of the people have been in credit card debt for more than a year.
    • The main causes of credit card debt are unexpected medical bills (15%), car repairs (9%) and home repairs (7%). 

    According to another Bankrate.com survey, 33% of Americans report they have more credit card debt than emergency savings.

    These last couple stats help us understand why so many people fall into debt in the first place.

    Some of it has to do with the failure to have emergency savings. When we don’t have savings, the first place we turn is to our credit cards.

    Even more has to do with the failure to keep our spending in check, or living below our means.

    library stacks with books indicating that if you're a lawyer in debt, you make plenty of money and the problem is not your income.
    Photo by Giammarco Boscaro on Unsplash

    Why is it so hard for lawyers to live below our means?

    “Live below your means.”

    “Money doesn’t grow on trees.”

    “Don’t break the bank.”

    We’ve all heard these common money phrases. If you were to ask someone older than you for one piece of personal finance advice, I’m betting you’ll hear one of these lessons.

    Let me know if I’m right about that in the comments below.

    There’s a reason these phrases are so common. They’re simple and easily reflect some of our core personal finance principles:

    Most of us understand that it makes sense to spend less money that we earn, right?

    How many of us remember rolling our eyes as kids after our parents wouldn’t buy something we wanted because money doesn’t grow on trees?

    I’ve started using this line with my own kids.

    Does anyone truly disagree with these lessons? If so, I’d be very appreciative to hear your perspective in the comments below.

    Why is it that we can all agree with these core personal finance lessons and at the same time choose to ignore them?

    For example, we intuitively know that we should live below our means, but nearly half of us carry a credit card balance.

    On top of that, hardly any of us are completely satisfied with our savings.

    It’s not that we want to have high debt and low savings.

    So why is this the reality for so many of us?

    Here are my three leading theories.

    1. We fall into debt because we are simply careless.

    When I struggled with debt at the beginning of my career, it was basic carelessness.

    I didn’t have any idea how to budget or make intentional choices with my money. I had never thought about why or how to be good with money.

    Like many people, I failed to create a budget and assumed that my W-2 income was plenty. I ignored emergency savings and never even thought about creating Parachute Money. 

    The saddest part is that I didn’t even realize that I was slipping backwards. I had no idea because I didn’t track my net worth or saving rate. I worked hard all year long and just hoped things would work out.

    By the way, if this sounds familiar, you should know by now I’m not judging anyone. I’ve been very open about my money mistakes.

    We all deserve a chance to learn about and talk about strong personal finance habits. That’s why I’m on a mission to flip the script: talking money is not taboo.

    2. We don’t plan ahead for emergencies.

    So, being careless with money is one common reason lawyers fall into debt. Another common reason is that bad things happen in life.

    This might include medical emergencies, home repairs or car troubles. It’s not our fault that these things happen. But, it is our fault if we’re not prepared in advance. 

    While these events are unfortunate, and maybe even tragic, they are not unexpected. We all need to expect that bad things will happen. 

    Preparing for the unexpected is part of every solid organization’s planning.

    In government, planning ahead means having a “rainy day fund.” 

    When managing properties, planning ahead for big repairs means having a “Capital Expenditures” or “Cap Ex” fund.

    For our personal finances, planning ahead means having an emergency fund. 

    Whether it’s government, business, or personal finance, the goal is to have options other than taking on debt to get through challenging circumstances.

    3. Blame the Kardashians.

    Besides carelessness and emergencies, there’s another powerful force that contributes to rising debt levels across the world.

    This force is nearly impossible to ignore. It’s become a part of our daily lives, whether we want to admit it or not. 

    What is this powerful force that contributes to our rising debt levels?

    The Kardashians.

    OK, not just the Kardashians, but they’re kind of the mascots.

    The era of social media and on-demand entertainment has made it harder than ever to avoid temptation. It’s everywhere we look.

    Blaming the Kardashians realtes to another timeless, common money phrase: “Keeping up with the Joneses.”

    The Kardashians are the modern day Joneses.

    Once upon a time, “the Joneses” represented your neighbors, people you could observe from a distance on a regular basis.

    The idea behind the phrase is that you can see what your neighbors are spending money on and are either consciously or subconsciously tempted to do the same.

    If your neighbors buy a new car, you buy a new car to keep pace.

    If your neighbors vacation in Australia, you research diving tours at The Great Barrier Reef.

    When you notice your neighbors hosting a backyard BBQ party with lots of happy looking people, you decide to host a party the next weekend.

    As humans, it can be difficult to ignore the temptation to keep up with our neighbors.

    Whether we like it or not, we are concerned with our social status. Part of our self-worth gets tied to comparing ourselves to others. 

    Who better to measure up against than the people in our neighborhood who we probably have a lot in common with?

    lawyers sitting around table with laptops indicating that if you're a lawyer in debt, you make plenty of money and the problem is not your income.
    Photo by Campaign Creators on Unsplash

    Keeping up with the Joneses is compounded in the professional setting.

    This same idea is oftentimes compounded in the professional setting, like at law firms. It is not uncommon to compare ourselves in the same way to our colleagues at the office. 

    This is especially difficult for lawyers. Fair or not, society generally expects lawyers to make a lot of money and have nice things.

    If a partner at your firm joins a country club, wears fancy clothes, or sends her kids to private school, you may feel pressured to do the same.

    It’s easy to get caught up in expensive tastes when you’re expected to fit in, even if you don’t have the money to spare.

    One of my favorite personal finance books, The Millionaire Next Door, discusses this concept in detail.

    I highly recommend you read this book if you are struggling with comparing yourself to others.

    So, what’s the solution for lawyers in debt? 

    Deactivate social media? Cancel the internet?

    Nah. If you did that, you’d miss out on epic Instagram reels like this one where I share my top five favorite personal finance books.

    Instead, the first part of the solution is to recognize when you’re making careless money decisions based on what you think other people are doing. 

    Making money decisions based off of your neighbors, let alone the Kardashians, is the fast road to debt.

    You have no idea why or how another person is spending money. For all you know, it’s all for show and that person is barely getting by. 

    Do you really want to blindly follow this person’s choices? Wouldn’t it be better to confer with people you trust to help you think through money decisions? 

    The second part of the solution is to recognize that everywhere you look, companies are clamoring for your dollars. 

    Not an exaggeration: nearly $2 Trillion (with a ‘T’) of marketing dollars are spent worldwide each year with one goal in mind: to separate you from your money.

    If you let that reality sink in, you’ll hopefully pause the next time you’re about to spend money on something you don’t actually care about.

    You make plenty of money as a lawyer. Your income is not the reason you’re in debt.

    As a lawyer, your income is not the reason you’re in debt.

    You make plenty of money. The issue is what you do with that money.

    This is where we circle back to money mindset.

    You need to have a competing force in your life that’s strong enough to overcome all the noise. 

    I’m referring to your ultimate goals in life. I mean the reasons you wake up every morning to get to the firm or stay up late to finish a brief. 

    Why are you working so hard? 

    When you can answer that question, you’ll know what your ultimate goals are in life.

    With those goals in the forefront of your mind, it’s much easier to make consistent, intentional money decisions. 

    Most importantly, you’ll stay on budget and avoid sinking into debt. 

    You’ll also be much happier when you stop worrying about what random strangers are spending money on.

    If you’re a lawyer in debt, are there other explanations for how you got there?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • A Reminder About the Intersection of Money and Life

    A Reminder About the Intersection of Money and Life

    By now, you should know that I love Chicago.

    It’s where I’m from, where I’ve chosen to raise my family, and where I primarily invest in real estate.

    Last night was a good night for Chicago sports fans.

    My favorite team, the Chicago Cubs, won a playoff series for the first time since 2017.

    While watching the game at home, I couldn’t help but think of how different my life is today than it was in 2017.

    Back then, I had season tickets and rarely missed a game. My wife and I were just about to get married. Life was good and about as easy as can be.

    From a financial perspective, we were pretty boring.

    By the way, being boring with money is not a bad thing.

    When it comes to money, boring is good.

    Back in 2017, my wife and I each made good incomes as attorneys. More importantly, we were happy saving a lot of the money we earned.

    We rented an apartment and had minimal expenses besides travel and our social lives.

    At that time, we had a good amount of savings because we were planning to buy a house after the wedding.

    Our only investments were in retirement accounts, like a Roth IRA and 401(k). We didn’t own any real estate.

    Life’s a bit different for me now.

    I don’t have season tickets anymore. We don’t travel as much.

    We have three kids and different financial priorities.

    Life is better than ever, but maybe not as easy as it was in 2017.

    OK, what does all this have to do with baseball?

    Last night at home, while watching the Cubs pull out a stressful victory, I started thinking about these things. I wasn’t in the crowd like in 2017, but I knew exactly how the fans were feeling.

    Each pitch was tense. The crowd went nuts after every Cubs hit or strikeout by a Cubs pitcher. Whenever the San Diego Padres had a rally going, every Cubs fan was nervous.

    In the end, the Cubs pulled out the victory and thousands of people now have memories they’ll never forget.

    There’s nothing better than playoff baseball. I love it and hate it at the same time.

    Watching the game, I thought of some of my favorite baseball memories. It was a good reminder of why it’s so important to think and talk about money.

    We say it a lot around here: money is only a tool. When used properly, you can use money to build lifelong memories. You can create stories that you’ll remember for the rest of your life.

    Stories like the ones I have from 2016 when the Cubs won the World Series.

    That’s when I met Phil and April.

    My nice friends, Phil and April.

    Throughout that World Series run, we sat next to the nicest couple in the world, Phil and April.

    Phil was a diehard Cubs fan. April was more reserved.

    Both were smart and very friendly. They were enjoyable people to sit with.

    We chatted baseball, mostly. Pitching changes. Send the runner. Question the manager. That sort of thing. Completely normal, unremarkable stuff. 

    Until Game 5.

    Game 5 was played on a crisp, October evening. Jackets and beanies weather in Chicago. Phil and April were sitting next to my brother and I, as usual.

    Mike Napoli was playing first base for Cleveland. Around the 3rd inning, a jerk four rows in front of us taunted Napoli with a crude, juvenile insult.

    It was apparent the jerk was doing his part to keep Old Style in business for another year.

    None of us liked what this jerk yelled.

    Phil especially didn’t like it.

    Phil was nice…and tough.

    Phil did what the rest of us were thinking but were too scared to do ourselves.

    Phil stood up. In so many words, Phil sternly recommended that the jerk knock it off and show some class.

    The jerk turned around, aggressively scanning the crowd for the man who had publicly shamed him. The jerk had that unmistakable look in his eye that meant, “Let’s dance.”

    My brother and I were a bit worried for our nice… and all of a sudden tough…friend, Phil. 

    Phil’s wife, April, did not look worried. She sat there like nothing strange was happening. Almost like she had seen this movie before.

    When the jerk locked eyes with Phil, he immediately saw that Phil was not backing down. If anything, Phil looked a little too eager.

    Well, the jerk was sloppy, but he had enough sense to recognize that he wanted no piece of Phil. He wisely turned back around and sat down quietly. 

    That was the last we heard from the jerk that night.

    Our nice (and tough) friend, Phil had restored order.

    chicago cubs sing lit up reminding me of why we spend money.
    Photo by Dastan Eraliev on Unsplash

    Phil’s on TV!

    On the day of the Cubs’ championship parade, my brother called me excitedly, “Phil’s on TV! Phil’s on TV!”

    It didn’t register right away who he was talking about.

    When I turned on the TV, sure enough, there was Phil, our World Series friend. I was so confused. Phil was giving an interview on set with the Cubs announcers.

    Our nice (and tough) friend, Phil? On TV? 

    I turned up the volume and listened to Phil talk about his experience watching the Cubs win the World Series. Maybe I was hoping he’d mention his nice friend, Matt. (He didn’t.)

    I still couldn’t figure out why Phil was on TV. 

    Why won’t they just put his name on the screen already!? 

    It wasn’t until the end of the interview that I learned who Phil was.

    All I could do was laugh. 

    Our nice, and confirmed tough, friend Phil is better known as World Wresting Entertainment (WWE) champion and icon, CM Punk.

    Oh, and his wife?

    WWE champion and bestselling author, AJ Mendez.

    Unknowing watching the Cubs win the World Series with two celebrities with a combined 3.5 million Instagram followers?

    Yup, that’s a story I’ll be telling for a while.

    A memory I wouldn’t trade for anything. 

    As much fun as the World Series was, my favorite Cubs memory actually took place during the 2015 season, the year before they won the World Series.

    It was during the 7th inning of Game 4 of the NLDS. This was the game where the Cubs knocked the rival St. Louis Cardinals out of the playoffs.

    In the 7th inning, with the Cubs up 5-4, Kyle Schwarber hit one of the most epic home runs in Cubs history, landing his moonshot on top of the new right field video board.

    It was such a feat, the ball is now enshrined where it landed.

    The entire stadium was rocking so loud, you could feel the ground shaking beneath your feet. Every fan was jumping up and down, hugging anyone close enough to touch.

    We were all dancing like nobody was watching. That moment was pure happiness. 

    I was there with my mom.

    A lifelong Chicagoan, she too was jumping up and down and high-fiving all the other diehard fans in our section.

    After the game, we met up with my wife at a restaurant and relived the victory over Champagne.

    That day with my mom and my future wife is one of the best memories I have.

    clear wine glass holding champagne, one of the best memories I have with my mom and spent money on.
    Photo by Oliver Sherwin on Unsplash

    What does this have to do with money?

    What does any of this have to do with money?

    When I say money is a tool to create stories and memories, this is what I mean.

    My brother and I still joke about our nice friends, Phil and April. I wouldn’t trade that memory with my mom for anything.

    These are the types of experiences that I want more of.

    These memories, and the desire for more like them, continue to motivate me today.

    I want to be good with money, not so I can stash it in the bank, but so I can use that money to create joy for me and my family.

    Beyond that, watching the crowd at Wrigley Field last night reminded me of why I started a personal finance blog.

    It excites me to try and help people make intentional money decisions for meaningful experiences with meaningful people.

    Talking money is really just talking life.

    You may not be a baseball fan, but this conversation illustrates a foundational concept of Think and Talk Money.

    Yes, we discuss money.

    But, we’re really talking about our lives and our experiences.

    Money is just a tool to help us. 

    And before you get cynical on me, of course money is not required for good experiences. That’s not the point.

    What I’m suggesting is that if we’re all spending so much of our time each week at work, shouldn’t we spend some time thinking about the money we earn so we can maximize experiences like I had with my mom? 

    Think and Talk Money is all about awakening that thought process so we can use the tool of money to fuel meaningful lives.

    You might not use that tool to get Cubs tickets.

    But, what if you started thinking about money as just a currency that you trade to get your time back so you can do more of what you want with who you want?

    Whatever it is that you’re after in life, thinking and talking about money will help get you there.

    Have you used money as a tool recently to create stories and memories?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • How Does Your Net Worth Compare to People Your Age?

    How Does Your Net Worth Compare to People Your Age?

    Pop quiz!

    What is your net worth?

    Kudos to you if you can answer that question quickly and relatively accurately.

    Knowing your net worth indicates you are likely making intentional choices with your money. You likely are more concerned with how much money you keep, not how much you make.

    It also likely means that you have a plan and are well on your way to financial independence.

    Well done!

    If you know your net worth, you might be wondering how you measure up to people your age.

    That’s what we’re going to look at today.

    First, let’s discuss why it’s important for all of us to track our net worth.

    Why is it important to track your net worth?

    By tracking your net worth, you can quickly see if you are making good money decisions or need to make adjustments.

    I recommend everybody, no matter where you are in your financial journey, track your net worth.

    By the way, tracking your net worth is not a major time commitment.

    It takes me less than 30 minutes each month to track and discuss what I consider to be one of the most important metrics in personal finance.

    That’s all the time it takes to know if I am progressing towards my most important financial goals.

    If you don’t know your net worth, now is the time to start tracking it.

    For a step-by-step guide to tracking your net worth, check out my post here:

    Why You Need to Track Your Net Worth Every Month

    Just like budgeting with two simple numbers, tracking your net worth is the best, and easiest, way to measure your money progress. 

    There’s no better way to learn how much money you’re keeping after a month of making money.

    Think of tracking your net worth in terms of keeping score during a basketball game.

    If you don’t know the score of the game, you don’t know if your strategy is working. You don’t know if you need to make adjustments before time runs out.

    The same applies to tracking your next worth. The point is to educate yourself on your current financial situation so you can make adjustments while there is still time.

    How do I know if I need to make adjustments based on my net worth?

    Speaking of making adjustments, it can sometimes be helpful to look at datasets to see how you measure up to the rest of the population.

    So today, we’ll look at two potentially helpfully net worth metrics.

    First, we’ll look at the average net worth of Americans by age.

    Then, we’ll look at the average net worth by age of the Top 1%.

    The goal is to give you some benchmarks so you can assess where you’re currently at. Then, you can decide if you want to make any adjustments.

    In other words, the point is to educate yourself so you can make intentional choices for your own situation. The point is not to start comparing yourself to your neighbors.

    OK, let’s get to it.

    green plant in clear glass cup indicating that net worth grows over time.
    Photo by micheile henderson on Unsplash

    What is the net worth of Americans by age?

    Below is the average and median net worth of Americans by age based on research from Empower.

    Keep in mind these studies are not perfect.

    It’s not an easy task to track and study net worth across a wide population. Not everyone tracks her net worth, let alone makes it easy for outsiders to track it.

    Use these figures as a rough guide to help your own decision-making. Just don’t get too caught up in the exact figures.

    Net Worth by Age


    Age    		Average Net WorthMedian Net Worth
    20s$121,004$6,609
    30s$307,343$24,247
    40s$743,456$75,719
    50s$1,330,746$191,857
    60s$1,547,378$290,447
    70s$1,444,413$233,085
    80s$1,342,656$233,436
    90s$1,212,583$205,043

    High school math refresher: The average is calculated by adding up all values in a dataset and dividing by the count. The median is the middle value of a dataset with an equal number of values above and below. Averages can be skewed by extreme values, so the median can give you a more accurate picture.

    Here are some observations about the average net worth of American by age:

    • Net worth tends to increase with age. No surprise there, right? As our careers progress, we tend to earn more and invest more money.
    • Net worth tends to peak in our 60s. This also makes sense. When people reach retirement age, they start to draw down their portfolio. They’ve spent decades accumulating wealth and eventually it’s time to spend that savings.
    • Notice the effects of compound interest. From the 20s to the 30s, we see that the median net worth nearly quadruples. That’s a 400% increase! However, it equates to a median net worth increase of only $18,000.
    • Compare that to the change from the 50s to 60s. We see that the median net worth increases by only 50%, but the result is an increase in nearly $100,000.
    • The takeaway is that when you have more money invested, smaller gains result in higher earnings. You could say, “the rich get richer.”

    What is the net worth by age of the top 1%?

    Next, let’s take a look at the average net worth by age of the Top 1%, thanks to an analysis of Federal Reserve data by DQYDJ.

    Remember, these are only rough figures. Use this data to help you strategize based on your current financial situation.

    Net Worth by Age of the Top 1%

    AgeTop 1% Net Worth
    18-24$653,224
    25-29$2,121,910
    30-34$2,636,882
    35-39$4,741,320
    40-44$7,835,420
    45-49$8,701,500
    50-54$13,231,940
    55-59$15,371,684
    60-64$17,869,960
    65-69$22,102,660
    70-74$18,761,580
    75-79$19,868,894
    80+$16,229,800

    Are these dollar amounts lower or higher than you expected?

    If these dollar amounts seem unattainable, remember that 99% of us will never hit these marks. Don’t get discouraged. You’re doing great work if you’re anywhere close to these numbers.

    Did you notice that the trends in the Top 1% net worth data are very similar to the average net worth by age data we previously looked at?

    We again see the net worth of the Top 1% peaking in the 60s.

    We also see the same effects of compound interest.

    This data reinforces the point that investing favors people who start early, even if the results do not materialize for decades. It takes time for compound interest to work its magic.

    young man and older man standing at bottom of stairs representing the importance of tracking your net worth.
    Photo by John Moeses Bauan on Unsplash

    Tracking your net worth is the best way to measure your personal financial progress.

    By now, you should have an idea of where you stand compared to the rest of the population.

    What can you do with this information?

    If you’re happy with how you measure up, that might mean you’ve reached a level of financial independence where you have options in life.

    Having options in life means that you’ve achieved the ultimate goal: FIPE (Financial Independence, Pivot Early).

    When you reach FIPE, you are free to pivot to a new challenge, if that’s what you want.

    On the other hand, maybe you looked at this data and learned that you are not as far along on your financial journey as you had hoped.

    Don’t panic.

    The benefit is that you can now make adjustments.

    What kind of adjustments can you make after learning your net worth?

    When you track and study your net worth, you can make adjustments while you still have time on your side.

    For example, you may decide that it’s finally time to boost your saving rate.

    After all, your saving rate is the one thing you can actually control on your way to financial independence.

    Or, you might take a fresh look at your Budget After Thinking to find ways to generate more fuel for your investments.

    And, it might mean saving and investing that one-time windfall instead of spending it on stuff you don’t really care about.

    Whatever decisions you make, knowing the average net worth by age can help point you in the right direction.

    It takes me less than 30 minutes per month to track my net worth.

    It takes me less than 30 minutes each month to track and study one of the most important numbers in personal finance.

    Each month, I’m only looking for progress compared to what my net worth was previously. 

    If my net worth increases over time, it means I am heading in the right direction.

    It means that I am continuing to fuel my Later Money goals. I am paying down debt. I’m letting my investments do their thing.

    If my net worth is not increasing, it means I need to figure out why and consider making adjustments. 

    Sometimes my net worth decreases because the markets are heading down. If that’s the case, I don’t do anything. At this stage in my life, I can afford to wait while markets tick back up.

    If the issue is that my debt is increasing, or I didn’t fuel my investments that month, I know I need to make adjustments. 

    By studying my net worth each month, I can catch these setbacks before they become a continuous problem.

    Do you track your net worth?

    Are you happy with how you measure up?

    If not, are you prepared to make the necessary adjustments?

  • How Much Money Did You Actually Keep This Week?

    How Much Money Did You Actually Keep This Week?

    The alarm clock goes off at 6:30 a.m.

    You groggily brush your teeth and hop in the shower.

    The hot water feels nice. Should I skip work today?

    Then, reality sets in. What time is my first meeting today?

    Shower done. Now, what to wear? The blue shirt? Again?

    Let’s go, let’s go! Pick up the pace! The kids need to get dressed and eat breakfast.

    Why are we always so rushed before school? Tomorrow, I’ll wake up earlier.

    The train will be here in 10 minutes. “Bye kids! Bye Honey!”

    I gotta get across the tracks! Speed walk!

    Phew. Made it.

    30 minutes to catch your breath before work starts.

    What day is it today? Tuesday?? It’s only Tuesday?!?!

    I’m tired.

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    How much money did you actually keep this week? #thinkandtalkmoney #personalfinance #richdadpoordad

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    Do you ever notice the people on the train?

    Does this routine sound familiar to anyone?

    At least you’ll have something to show for it come pay day.

    Wait, you go through all that effort every day and you’re not saving a good portion of your paycheck?

    Let’s talk about that.

    When I take the train downtown, I can’t help but notice my fellow passengers.

    Some people are already cranking away on their laptops. Some are even on conference calls, which always surprises me.

    Why don’t they care that everyone is annoyed with them? Do the other people on the call know that they’re talking to someone on a train?

    But, I digress.

    Some passengers are reading books. A good portion of passengers are doomscrolling. Just about everyone has headphones in.

    It’s not that people look unhappy. They just seem to want to be somewhere else.

    Do you have similar observations?

    Most people don’t have a plan.

    It’s at times like these when I start to wonder how many of these people have a plan.

    I’m not talking about a plan for lunch or for getting to the gym after work.

    I mean a plan for how to spend their time and their money.

    Ideally, this plan would be based upon spending time on meaningful pursuits with meaningful people.

    My guess is most people have never really thought about this kind of plan.

    Instead, it’s go to work. Get a paycheck. Pay the bills.

    Same thing tomorrow. That’s as far as the plan goes.

    This routine may be enough for some, or even most, people. If that’s enough for you, there’s no shame in it. Holding down a steady job and providing for your family are accomplishments to be proud of you.

    But, let’s be real.

    You’re reading a personal finance blog.

    We spend a lot of time talking about financial freedom and creating options.

    You wouldn’t still be reading if you didn’t feel there was more to life than the daily train ride, right?

    You may not know how or when to get off the train, but you’re interested in finding out if it’s possible.

    Well, it’s definitely possible. But, you need to break the cycle and commit to a plan.

    Here’s a question to help you get started.

    How many hours do you work to make money?

    Wide view image of blank black spiral note pad and white marker with calligraphic inscription plan on yellow background meaning we all need a plan to keep our money.
    Photo by Volodymyr Hryshchenko on Unsplash

    Let’s say you work 2,000 hours per year to make money (40 hours per week, 50 weeks per year). 

    We won’t even count all the hours you spend getting dressed and riding the train.

    Also, we will pretend you’re not looking at your emails in the evening, on weekends, and on family vacations. 

    We definitely won’t count the hours you’re staring at the ceiling fan worried about tomorrow’s challenges at work.

    OK, so you’re working 2,000 hours (plus) per year to make money.

    My question is:

    How many hours per year do you think about what to do with that money?

    Let that sink in for a moment.

    You work a lot of hours. I’m guessing many of those hours are stressful.

    Yes, you get paid money in exchange for those hours.

    But, do you still have any of that money?

    Do you care more about making money or keeping money?

    Think back on how much time, energy, and sacrifice you dedicated to making that money.

    Hopefully, you saved and invested a good portion of that money.

    The problem is that most lawyers and professionals work incredibly hard, make good money, and don’t keep enough of it.

    They somehow find 2,000 or 3,000 hours per year to work.

    But, they won’t set aside even a few hours per month to think about what to do with all that money.

    This is why I am passionate about money wellness.

    Most people spend the vast majority of their lives worried about making money and practically no time at all thinking about what to do with that money.

    No, I’m not suggesting that you need to think about money for 2,000 hours per year.

    What I am suggesting is that even a little bit of time each week spent thinking and talking about money is just as important as the time you spent earning it.

    That’s how you break the cycle of mindlessly riding the train to work and start progressing towards financial freedom.

    It’s not how much money you make. What matters is how much you keep.

    Robert Kiyosaki put it best in Rich Dad Poor Dad, “It’s not how much money you make. It’s how much money you keep.”

    If you knew someone who made $1,000,000 per year, and at the end of the year, had only saved $20,000, what would your reaction be?

    Sadly, this is how most people behave with their money.

    They inherently know that they should be saving more, but they come up with excuses. They assure themselves that they’ll start saving more next year.

    On the other hand, what if you knew someone who made $100,000 per year and saved $40,000?

    Did your reaction change?

    This is the kind of person who will actually achieve financial freedom and have choices in life.

    It all comes down to how much you keep, not how much you make.

    It’s why your personal saving rate is so important.

    Don’t forget, your saving rate is the one thing you can truly control.

    Bambu eco toothbrush in a glass bottle symbolizing the morning rush to get out of the house.
    Photo by Superkitina on Unsplash

    What is a saving rate?

    Your saving rate is simply the amount of money you save each month divided by the amount of money you make.

    Saving rate = Money Saved / Money Earned

    Just like staying on budget with two simple numbers, you can monitor your progress with this simple formula.

    I find it helpful to measure your saving rate based on your monthly income and savings. This way it matches up with your Budget After Thinking. 

    Tracking your saving rate will help you understand if you are making progress over time. 

    It’s not about comparing yourself to someone else. Whatever your current saving rate is, the goal is to seek personal improvement. 

    Just like with tracking your net worth, the purpose is to see if you are making personal progress over time.

    How can you make progress with your saving rate over time?

    When it comes down to it, there are really only two ways to improve your saving rate.

    1. You can spend less, and save more, of the money you’re currently making.
    2. You can make more money and save most of that money, all while keeping your expenses the same.

    Combining those two ideas is even better: make more money, spend about the same. 

    Use the excess money you make to fuel your Later Money goals.

    If you can do that, your saving rate and your net worth will steadily climb.

    You’ll realize that you’re closer to getting off the train than you think.

    How much money did you keep this week?

    When you get your next paycheck, pay attention to how much of that money you actually keep.

    Once you pay the mortgage/rent, car payment, and credit card bills, is there anything left for you?

    If your saving rate is low, this exercise should make you mad.

    Seeing 95% of your hard-earned money disappear as soon as it comes in should inspire you to make some adjustments.

    Those adjustments may be small at first. Over time, you’ll experience that it feels better to keep money than to spend money.

    Keeping money leads to options.

    Spending money leads back to the train.

    Have you ever observed your fellow commuters in the morning? What are your takeaways?

    Do you have a plan to get off the train, should that be your choice?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Your Saving Rate is the One Thing You Can Truly Control

    Your Saving Rate is the One Thing You Can Truly Control

    On your journey to financial freedom, there is only so much you can control.

    The reality is, like most things in life, much of our financial journey is out of our hands.

    If your gut reaction is that I’m wrong about that, that’s OK. I get it. I used to be in denial, too.

    Really smart people, like Think and Talk Money readers, don’t want to acknowledge that they aren’t in complete control of their financial lives.

    To illustrate my point, here are just a few things that you can’t control on your way to financial freedom:

    1. You can’t control the returns you’re going to get in the stock market. It’s reasonable to project 10% average annual returns based on historical performance. Also, we use 10% merely as a projection for planning purposes. But, there’s no guarantee anybody will earn 10% per year.
    2. You can’t control whether a real estate investment appreciates. We all certainly hope our properties increase in value over time. We do our best to target areas where appreciation is likely. But, once again, there’s no guarantee.
    3. You can’t control if your employer is going to give you a raise. Of course, you can work hard. Also, you can outperform all the metrics. You can go above and beyond to deliver massive value to your company. However, when it’s time for your annual salary review, it’s not up to you how much all that is worth.

    So, am I wrong about any of that?

    Gee, thanks for the doom and gloom, Matt.

    I know, I know. Not what you want to hear.

    Don’t be discouraged. All is not lost.

    There is one crucial element that you can control on your way to financial freedom.

    Today, we’ll focus on the one crucial element that you actually can control on your way to financial freedom.

    It’s such an important concept that Mr. Money Mustache’s blog post from years ago is still a classic: The Shockingly Simple Math Behind Early Retirement.

    Even more so, it’s such a powerful concept that you won’t find a personal finance blog, book or podcast that doesn’t emphasize its importance.

    What is the secret?

    What is the one thing you can control above all else?

    The one thing you can truly control is your saving rate.

    If you ignore every piece of investment advice out there and focus on your saving rate, you are going to be in great shape.

    Let’s examine why.

    What is a saving rate?

    Your saving rate is simply the amount of money you save each month divided by the amount of money you make.

    Saving rate = Money Saved / Money Earned

    Just like staying on budget with two simple numbers, you can monitor your progress with this simple formula.

    I find it helpful to measure your saving rate based on your monthly income and savings. This way it matches up with your Budget After Thinking. 

    I also find it most useful to express your saving rate as a percentage. To see your saving rate percentage, all you need to do is multiply your saving rate by 100.

    Saving rate % = (Money Saved / Money Earned) x 100

    Moving forward, when I refer to saving rate, I will be talking about your saving rate percentage. It’s more informative to see what percentage of your money you are saving, rather than an amount with no context.

    What I mean is this: if someone asked me if saving $10,000 per year was a good target, I wouldn’t be able to comment with more context. 

    If that person was making $75,000 per year, I would say that seems OK. That’s a saving rate of more than 13%.

    On the other hand, if someone told me they were making $750,000 per year, and only saving $10,000, I would recommend that person revisit their Budget After Thinking.

    That’s a saving rate percentage of only 1.3%.

    That’s… bad.

    Flying back from Half Moon Bay, California to San Jose I captured this moment as we were descending over the Silicon Valley representing what we can control in life like our saving rate.
    Photo by Chris Leipelt on Unsplash

    What can I learn from tracking my saving rate?

    Tracking your saving rate will help you understand if you are making progress over time. It’s not about comparing yourself to someone else.

    Whatever your current saving rate is, the goal is to seek personal improvement. Just like with tracking your net worth, the purpose is to see if you are making personal progress over time.

    When it comes down to it, there are really only two ways to improve your saving rate.

    1. You can spend less, and save more, of the money you’re currently making.
    2. You can make more money and save most of that money, all while keeping your expenses the same.

    Combining those two ideas is even better. Like we just said, make more money, spend about the same. 

    Use the excess money you make to fuel your Later Money goals.

    If you can do that, your saving rate and your net worth will steadily climb. You’ll experience that your Later Money goals are closer to becoming reality than you think.

    Why it’s important to focus what you can control, like your saving rate.

    My point here is show you how dramatically one decision can accelerate your progress towards your goals.

    Each additional amount saved is one step closer to financial freedom.

    Sometimes, we all need to ask ourselves:

    “Is spending more money right now on things I don’t really care about going to make me happier?”

    “Do I even want to go out to more restaurants? Or fancier restaurants?”

    “Do I despise my home/my car/my wardrobe so much that I must replace it immediately?”

    Only you can answer these questions. 

    Maybe you’ll realize that your life is pretty good right now as it is.

    You might just decide that you don’t need the extra money at this moment. 

    You’d rather use the money as fuel for what you really want in life.

    Here’s an example showing the importance of your saving rate.

    Scott Trench, author of one of my favorite money wellness books, Set for Life, is a big advocate of improving your saving rate.

    In a recent episode of his BiggerPockets Money podcast, Trench emphasized just how important your saving rate is using a simple example.

    Let’s use that example to explore how improving your saving rate can accelerate your journey to financial freedom.

    Assume that you earn $100,000 per year (after taxes for simplicity).

    You are a pretty good saver and save 20% of your income, or $20,000. For most people, targeting a saving rate of 20% is pretty solid.

    Of course, if you save 20% of your income, that means you spend 80% of your income, or $80,000 per year:

    • Take Home Pay: $100,000
    • Annual Spending: $80,000
    • Annual Savings: $20,000

    Based on the above, we can project how long you will have to work to fund one year of your life.

    Because you spend $80,000 per year and you save $20,000 per year, you would have to work four years to save enough money to fund one year of your lifestyle:

    $20,000 saved x 4 years = $80,000 saved (1 year of spending)

    In other words, you would need to work four years to buy one year of financial freedom.

    Not bad, huh?

    But, look what happens when you improve your saving rate.

    a woman sitting a desk with a a laptop computer representing what we can control in life like our saving rate.
    Photo by Alexandr Podvalny on Unsplash

    What happens if you double your saving rate from 20% to 40%?

    Now, let’s see what happens if you double your saving rate to 40%. That means you are saving $40,000 per year and only spending $60,000 per year.

    The result is that you now only need 1.5 years of work to fund one year of financial freedom:

    $40,000 saved x 1.5 years = $60,000 saved (1 year of spending)

    Notice that two things are happening at the same time when you increase your saving rate.

    First, you are saving more money each year. That’s a good thing.

    Second, you are spending less money each year. That’s another good thing.

    The result is that when you spend less money, you need to accumulate less money to fund your lifestyle.

    It’s a double whammy. In a good way.

    Should we complete our example by taking it one step further?

    Let’s say you have a 50% saving rate. That means you save $50,000 per year and spend $50,000 per year.

    How long do you have to work to buy one year of financial freedom?

    Only one year.

    $50,000 saved x 1 year = $50,000 saved (1 year of spending).

    Now, that’s cool.

    It’s motivating to think of your saving rate in terms of years to financial freedom.

    So, what’s the takeaway here?

    It can be extremely motivating to think of your saving rate in terms of how long you have to work until financial freedom.

    Each incremental amount that you save means you’re boosting your savings at the same time you’re reducing your spending.

    When you pull both of those levers at the same time, you accelerate your progress towards financial freedom.

    This thought process is especially helpful for people who feel that math is not their thing. It doesn’t get much simpler than viewing savings in terms of buying financial freedom.

    The cool part is that once you hit a 50% saving rate, you can essentially buy a year of financial freedom for every year that year work.

    Keep in mind that that this simple illustration ignores any investment returns you may get from your savings.

    Don’t worry, those investment returns will generally reduce the length of time you need to work even more. Check out Mr. Money Mustache’s post for more on that point.

    Setting aside investment returns, the purpose here is to drive home the point that the more you save, the faster you’ll reach financial freedom.

    That’s why it’s so important to focus on your saving rate. You can’t control everything, but you can certainly work on your saving and spending.

    Have you ever calculated your saving rate in terms of how quickly you can achieve financial freedom?

    Does this example motivate you to save even more?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Did You Win the $1.787 Billion Powerball Jackpot!?

    Did You Win the $1.787 Billion Powerball Jackpot!?

    No!?

    Me neither.

    It looks like there are two winners, one from Texas and one from Missouri, who will split the massive payout.

    It’s simply an astonishing amount of money. Congratulations to the winners!

    I can’t be the only one thinking that money like that could easily be a blessing and a curse, right?

    Hopefully, the winners take their time and come up with a plan to not only make sure the money lasts, but that they use it in a meaningful way.

    Well, just because we didn’t win doesn’t mean we can’t take advantage of this opportunity.

    In the spirit of the massive jackpot, I started thinking about what I would do in a more realistic scenario.

    Specifically, I asked myself:

    What would I do if I woke up tomorrow with $178,000 in my checking account?

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    What I’m doing if $178,000 hit my bank account today. #thinkandtalkmoney #lottery #personalfinance #financialfreedom #529plan

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    I know it’s not as exciting as thinking about what you would do with $1 billion, but I think it’s more important because it is actually realistic.

    Yes, I said realistic.

    I truly believe that if you are a high-earning professional, like a lawyer, consultant, or real estate investor, it will happen.

    There will come a point in your career (hopefully multiple points) where you earn a one-time windfall of $178,000.

    For example, it may come in the form of a bonus, a commission, or profits from a sale.

    When that time comes in your life, you want to be ready.

    The last thing you want to do is waste that golden opportunity. You may never get another chance to materially impact your life so much in one shot.

    So, let’s have some fun and plan out what we would do if we wake up tomorrow with an extra $178,000 in our bank accounts.

    Here’s exactly what I would do.

    The first thing I would do with $178,000 is pay off high interest debt.

    I think of a bonus like this as a one-time “Get Out of Jail Free” card.

    With $178,000, the first thing I would do is pay off any high interest debt that I have. High interest debt includes credit card debt, personal loans, and any lines of credit.

    My main financial goal this year was to pay off the rest of the HELOC we used to buy our last rental property. That’s my first move with this windfall.

    Once the debt is eliminated, I’ll be free to pursue more fun life goals. And, I’ll feel better without having that debt hanging over my head.

    slot machines in a casino on the Las Vegas Strip, Nevada which is not the best way to plan your financial future but is a good way to think about what you would do with a windfall.
    Photo by Steve Sawusch on Unsplash

    Next, I would set aside $15,000 to $20,000 for fun money.

    I would use about 10% of the money for fun right now. That comes out to approximately $15,000 to $20,000.

    That is the equivalent of a really nice vacation or two. Or, it could be new furniture for the house, new gadgets or toys (like a bike or golf clubs), or anything else that brings me joy.

    I’m a firm believer that we have to enjoy the journey while we’re on it. Having eliminated all high interest debt, I’ve earned the privilege to have some fun with a responsible portion of this money.

    The strange thing is that for people who are dedicated to achieving financial freedom, spending money can be very difficult.

    The temptation is to save and invest every possible dollar. As tempting as that may be, I encourage you to resist the urge to “live in the spreadsheet.”

    This is a chance to do something for yourself that brings joy and happiness. Whatever that is for you, take advantage.

    Otherwise, what’s the point in working so hard in the first place?

    Next, I would revisit my Tiara Goals for financial freedom.

    Let’s say after paying off high-interest debt and setting some money aside for fun, I have $100,000 remaining.

    What you do with the remaining $100,000 will vary depending on where you currently are in life and what your main priorities are.

    This is why I always talk about the importance of having your ultimate life goals written down and consulting them regularly.

    I refer to my ultimate life goals as my Tiara Goals. Before I save and invest the remaining $100,000, I’m going to look at my Tiara Goals for inspiration.

    With my Tiara Goals in mind, my top priorities right now are to eliminate HELOC debt, pay for my three kids’ college, and build my emergency fund.

    Each one of these priorities align with my Tiara Goals and help me get closer and closer to true financial independence.

    Because I have been aggressively acquiring real estate for the past seven years, college savings and emergency savings have been secondary goals.

    Now that I’m not presently in the market for more rental properties, I can prioritize saving for college and emergencies.

    With this windfall, I can make significant headway to satisfy both of those goals.

    I would then use $67,000 to fund my son’s college education.

    I recently used an online calculator to figure out how much money I would need to invest right now in my son’s 529 savings account to fully fund his college.

    For my calculations, I targeted the premier in-state university where I live (the University of Illinois). I assumed a 10% average annual rate of return on my investment and a 5% annual increase in tuition.

    I learned that with an investment today of $67,000, I could fully fund my son’s in-state tuition.

    The key is to let that money grow for the next 15 years to take advantage of compound interest.

    What an accomplishment that would be to not have to worry about his future college. I could cross that item off the “to-do” list once and for all.

    So, with the next $67,000 of my windfall, I would fully fund my kid’s in-state tuition.

    Disclaimer: if you’re doing this math for your own three-year-old, keep in mind that I’ve already begun to fund my son’s 529 account. The $67,000 is the difference that I need to add today in order to hit my goal. If you do the calculations yourself, you might come up with a different number.

    With my son’s college tuition taken care of, I would move onto my next goal, which is to fund my emergency savings account.

    Before we get to that, you may be wondering why I targeted the in-state school for my projections instead of aiming for a more expensive private school.

    Why did I target in-state tuition?

    It’s not that I don’t want my kids to have the option to attend a more expensive private school.

    It’s that I have other goals that I want to accomplish in my life at the same time I’m saving for college. I view the in-state tuition target as a reasonable, minimum goal to strive for.

    And, if my kid chooses to attend a more expensive private school, I plan on having additional ways to pay for it.

    For example, my overall financial plan includes owning rental properties even after my kids go to college. I can use that rental property income to help pay for college.

    Additionally, I plan on still earning income through a primary job. I can use that income to help pay for their college.

    Between now and then, I can invest in more rental properties, a traditional brokerage account, or any other investment vehicle of my choosing.

    I’ll still have the option to use that money to pay for college. The benefit is that I’ll have more flexibility.

    Plus, you never know. Maybe my kid will earn a scholarship. Maybe my kid does not end up going to college.

    Having different investments besides a college savings plan means that I’ll have options.

    slot machines showing 7's, which is not the best way to think about your future but is a good time to think about what you would do with a windfall.
    Photo by SLNC on Unsplash

    I would save the remaining $33,000 in an emergency savings account.

    Finally, I would take the remaining $33,000 and put it into a high-interest savings account.

    I have no immediate needs for this money. I have income coming in from a variety of sources, including my primary job, my rental properties and my job as an adjunct professor.

    However, it’s been a goal of mine for a few years to bump up my emergency savings. It’s been a risk not having much saved up for emergencies, and I’m taking this chance to eliminate that risk.

    Because I’m not currently in the market for more real estate, I can save this money for emergencies instead of worrying about a down payment for my next acquisition.

    With my emergency savings account more adequately funded, I can better protect myself should disaster strike.

    That’s why I’m putting the final $33,000 in my emergency savings account.

    How would you use $178,000 today?

    So, that’s how I would use a $178,000 windfall today.

    It’s not as fun as thinking about $1.78 billion, but it’s a more realistic thought experience.

    In case you’re wondering, if I had more money to invest at this point, I would focus on my baby girl’s college. I would use the same methodology that I used to plan for my son‘s college.

    No matter the amount of money, it’s good to have a plan ahead of time. As a high-earning professional, the odds are that you will earn a significant bonus like this at some point in your career.

    It might not be $178,000, but the thought process will work no matter what the amount is.

    The takeaway is that it’s always a good idea to have a plan before you earn the money.

    Enjoy some. Save and invest the bulk of it.

    What would you do with a windfall like this?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Financial Independence is Not About a Life of Deprivation

    Financial Independence is Not About a Life of Deprivation

    Stop me if you’ve heard this advice before:

    “Cancel all your subscriptions and save $1,000 a year!”

    “Cut out your morning coffee if you really want to be wealthy!”

    “Buy your Christmas presents in January when the sales start!”

    Because of advice like this, there’s a common misconception that people who want financial independence have to lead a life of deprivation.

    Nope.

    I refuse to believe that.

    Financial independence about so much more than that.

    Financial independence is not reserved for people willing to cut their spending to the bone.

    It’s for anyone willing to make intentional money decisions, including the decision to earn more money and not cut spending.

    How did financial independence become synonymous with deprivation?

    As my three-year-old asks during story time, “And, then there’s a problem?”

    Yes, son, there’s a problem.

    Too many people believe that financial independence is only about cutting spending.

    That’s a big problem that is holding people back.

    See, most of us lawyers and professionals work a ton of hours. We are already making major sacrifices.

    To throw in major reductions in spending on our way to financial independence is not a worthwhile tradeoff.

    Life is too short. None of us are guaranteed tomorrow.

    I learned this lesson a long time ago by representing clients with mesothelioma, a sudden and fatal cancer.

    That’s why I never encourage anyone to cut out spending on things and experiences that make them happy today.

    Does this mean we should all go out and spend every dollar we make?

    Of course not.

    No matter what, you’ll always need to live within your means.

    If you are spending more than you’re earning, you’ll never be financially independent.

    However, if you earn decent money and invest it the right way, you will reach financial independence.

    And, you don’t need to stop spending money on the way.

    FIRE has taken on an unintended meaning.

    One of the problems in the personal finance space is that many people first learn about financial independence in the context of FIRE (Financial Independence, Retire Early).

    Unfortunately, there’s a stereotype that FIRE is only for people willing to aggressively lower their expenses.

    In other words, the mistaken belief is that people who practice FIRE can only survive if they cut out most of life’s luxuries.

    Even though this misconception fails to capture the true spirt of FIRE, the damage has already been done.

    Too many people who I speak with get so discouraged by hearing “cut, cut, cut!” that they lose all interest in pursuing financial independence.

    It’s not that these people are financially irresponsible. They mostly live within their means and save for important goals.

    At the same time, they want to enjoy everything that life has to offer. And as mentioned above, I don’t mean enjoy life “years down the road.” They work hard and want to spend money to enjoy life today.

    For people like this, FIRE’s perceived focus on deprivation is unappealing.

    This is one of the reasons I don’t like to use the word FIRE around here. I prefer FIPE: Financial Independence, Pivot Early.

    Standing on a sheer ledge illustrating that financial independence is about having more, not spending less.
    Photo by Jason Hogan on Unsplash

    Have you noticed in the blog that we talk more about investing than cutting expenses?

    If you’ve been a consistent reader of the blog, you likely noticed that we haven’t talked much about cutting back on spending lately.

    We’ve been focused on creating wealth through investing, whether your preference is to invest in stocks or real estate.

    I certainly encourage people to generate as much fuel as possible for their investments, especially early in their careers.

    That way, you can benefit from long-term wealth generators like compound interest and appreciation.

    Generating more money to invest, of course, involves making spending choices. These types of choices are the essence of the budgeting process.

    However, instead of focusing on cutting your expenses to the bone, I recommend you create a reasonable Budget After Thinking that you can actually stick to.

    If you eliminate all the fun stuff, no budget will last very long.

    In a lot of ways, this advice is like dieting. Sure, you can lose 10 pounds in a few weeks if you eliminate every indulgence. But, how long is that diet going to work?

    I recommend that you have a budget that you can stick to long term. Then, commit yourself to fighting lifestyle creep as you start making more money.

    If you can do those two things, you don’t have to dramatically cut your expenses.

    Yes, you have to keep your spending within reason.

    No, you don’t have to cancel all your subscriptions.

    Focus on earning more, not just spending less.

    A good friend of ours just made $750 by doing one property showing. In total, she probably worked an hour to earn that money.

    Compare that to the advice of cutting out your daily coffee ritual. If you consciously deprive yourself of coffee every day for an entire year, you could save about $1,000.

    What would you rather do?

    Work just a little bit more with a side hustle of your choosing, or cut out something that you enjoy each morning?

    Do you really have to think that long about it?

    Of course, you already know which option I’m pursuing.

    woman sitting by water Bodega Bay ocean with woman standing by water illustrating that financial independence is about having more, not spending less.
    Photo by Becca Tapert on Unsplash

    I am a big fan of side hustle.

    I’ve had side hustles for just about my entire career as a lawyer.

    My first side hustle was as an adjunct professor at a local law school, teaching just one class. I eventually turned that into teaching four classes.

    In the meantime, I also launched a rental property business with my wife, now managing 11 units in Chicago and Colorado.

    We’re doing this with three young kids at home. I’m not bragging. My point is that I roll my eyes whenever anyone tells me he is too busy to make extra money.

    By the way, earning more money does not only apply to side hustles.

    There are always ways to make more money within your primary job.

    For example, can you earn a larger bonus by performing better?

    Can you ask your employer for more responsibilities and a corresponding raise?

    Or, can you earn additional money by generating business for your company?

    Lawyers, like most professionals, have the ability to earn more money if they generate business. That means bringing in clients.

    How can you find these clients?

    You can make it a priority to go to more events where you might meet potential clients.

    You could launch a blog or create other content to help people find you and know what you do.

    Either one of these pursuits could be your side hustle.

    There are endless opportunities for anyone that is motivated and is looking to earn more money.

    And when you earn that additional money, you’re on your way to financial independence without having to sacrifice the things that make your daily life enjoyable.

    OK, but I don’t even like coffee.

    I know, I’m picking on coffee. Coffee is an easy target, but it’s just one example.

    Maybe coffee is not your problem. Let’s say that you’ve cut out family vacations.

    Family vacations can be expensive. There’s no doubt about it.

    But instead of eliminating vacations, what if you could find a way to earn an extra $5,000? That could turn into a really nice family vacation.

    For some people, this is a no-brainer. They find a way to earn more money.

    Other people will simply skip the family vacation because it’s too expensive.

    At this stage in my life, I’m not willing to do that. I have three young kids. I already feel like they’re growing up too fast.

    A year ago, my daughter wouldn’t let go of my hand when I walked her to school. Now, she’s “too cool” to waive goodbye to Daddy.

    The idea of skipping out on family vacations does not appeal to me at all. I know that there will come a day when I would really regret that choice.

    Instead of eliminating family vacations, I would rather find a way to make more money.

    You can have anything you want; you just can’t have everything.

    Warren Buffett famously told his kids that they could have anything they wanted. They just couldn’t have everything.

    That sums up my approaching to spending. If there’s something I truly want that doesn’t currently fit in my budget, I would prefer to earn more instead of giving up on having that thing or experience.

    I might get there through a side hustle. I might get there through investing. If it’s something I value enough, I will get there one way or the other.

    If you focus on your income, not just cutting expenses, you can continue your journey to financial independence without giving up these things that make life special.

    Or, you can cut out the coffee and vacations, if that’s your preference.

    I’d rather challenge myself to make more money so I don’t have to make those sacrifices.

    Do you think financial independence is only for people willing to aggressively cut their spending?

    Or, do you agree that financial independence is for anybody willing to work for it?

  • How to Think About Investing in Both RE and the Stock Market

    How to Think About Investing in Both RE and the Stock Market

    Let’s say that you have $200,000 that you want to invest.

    Up to this point, all of your investments are in the stock market, mostly through tax-advantaged retirement accounts like a 401(k).

    However, you’ve recently started thinking about buying your first rental property.

    You have an important question to sort through:

    Should you buy your first rental property or just keep investing in the stock market?

    This is a common dilemma for all real estate investors, not just people thinking about buying their first rental property. Personally, I’ve been thinking about this question quite a bit lately.

    The way I see it?

    Why not do both?

    Why not build your overall investment portfolio to include both stocks and at least one rental property?

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    Happy to provide the geniuses a place to live. #thinkandtalkmoney #realestateinvesting #rentalproperty #genius

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    Today, we’ll explore why you may want to invest in the stock market and own rental properties.

    If you’ve been on the fence about buying your first rental property, this post will help you think about why it may be a good idea.

    Real estate is my favorite asset class.

    It’s no secret that real estate is my favorite asset class. Without my four rental properties, my journey to financial freedom would look much different.

    I’m confident that real estate will remain a powerful asset class moving forward.

    That’s because no matter how much the world changes with AI, quantum computing or any other new technology, I know one thing will always be true:

    People will always need a place to live.

    At this point in my life, I know that I’ll never become a brilliant coder or software engineer solving the world’s hardest problems.

    But, I can provide the geniuses a place to live.

    That’s why I’m comfortable with the majority of my net worth being in real estate right now.

    By investing in rental properties, I can make money in four different ways:

    1. Rental property cash flow is king.

    With cash flow, you can cover your immediate life expenses. For anybody hoping to reach financial freedom, it is essential to have income to pay for your present day life expenses. 

    For my money, cash flow from rental properties is the best way to pay for those immediate expenses.

    If your present day expenses are already covered, you can use your cash flow to fund additional investments. 

    That might mean buying another rental property or investing in another asset class, like stocks.

    2. Long-term wealth through appreciation.

    Appreciation simply refers to the gradual increase in a property’s value over time. 

    While cash flow can provide for my immediate expenses, appreciation is all about the long-term benefits.

    Like investing in stocks over the long run, real estate tends to go up in value. The key is to hold a property long enough to benefit from that appreciation.

    To benefit from appreciation, all I really need to do is make my monthly mortgage payments, keep my property in decent condition, and let the market do the rest.

    3. With rental properties, other people pay off my debt.

    When I buy a rental property, I take out a mortgage and agree to pay the bank each month until that mortgage is paid off. At all times, I remain responsible for paying back that debt.

    However, I do not pay that debt back with my own money. 

    Instead, I rent out the property to tenants. I do my best to provide my tenants with a nice place to live in exchange for monthly rent payments.

    I then use those rent payments to pay back the loan.

    As my loan balance shrinks, my equity in the property increases. Equity is just another way of saying ownership interest.

    When my equity in a property increases, my net worth increases. 

    4. Real estate investors earn massive taxes benefits.

    When you earn rental income, you must report this income on your tax return. Rental income is treated the same as ordinary income.

    However, the major difference between rental income and W-2 income is that there are a number of completely legal ways to deduct certain expenses from your rental income.

    Common rental property expenses may include mortgage interest, property tax, operating expenses, depreciation, and repairs. We’ll touch on a few of these deductions below.

    With all of these available deductions, the end result is that most savvy real estate investors pay little, or nothing, in taxes on their rental income each year.

    Yes, you read that right.

    I’ll say it again, just to be clear:

    Most savvy real estate investors legally pay nothing in taxes on their rental income each year.

    Even though I love owning rental properties, I still invest in the stock market.

    While there are certainly real estate investors out there who are 100% committed to real estate, I’m not one of them.

    Even with my passion for rental property investing, I have a significant portion of my net worth in the stock market.

    For one reason, I enjoy having some totally passive income streams. Compared to being a landlord, there is essentially zero work involved in being a passive stock investor.

    For another reason, I see the value in having multiple, diverse streams of income to help protect me against life’s uncertainties.

    Plus, like many of you, my investing journey began with my employer-sponsored 401(k) plan.

    401(k) investing is easy and relatively straightforward. With automatic contributions from my paychecks, I don’t even need to think about funding my account.

    As a W-2 employee since 2009, without even thinking about it, I’ve invested regularly in the stock market and enjoyed the benefits of compound interest.

    As my career progressed and my family grew, I added investment accounts to my portfolio.

    Besides my 401(k), my favorite investment accounts include a Roth IRA, 529 college savings accounts for my three kids, and a Health Savings Account.

    In conjunction with my rental properties, I view each of these different investments as part of my overall strategy to reach financial independence.

    Combined, I refer to these different investment and income streams as Parachute Money.

    Reach for the sky. Sometimes normal is too boring. invest in both real estate and the stock market for a safe landing with Parachute Money.
    Photo by Vlad Hilitanu on Unsplash

    What is Parachute Money?

    Parachute Money is one of my favorite concepts in all of personal finance.

    Pretend your life is like flying on an airplane.

    For whatever reason, you decide you need to get off this airplane. You decide to take control and make a change. You’re ready to jump.

    All you need is a parachute.

    You have a choice between the only two parachutes on the plane.

    The first parachute has only one string (or line) connecting the canopy to the harness . You think to yourself, “This doesn’t seem very safe. What if that one string breaks? That would end very badly for me.”

    Then, you look at the second parachute.

    The second parachute has 10 strings. You say to yourself, “OK, this one looks much safer. If one string breaks, the parachute still has nine other strings to keep me safe. Even if something goes wrong with one or two strings, I would glide safely to the ground.”

    It’s obvious which one of these parachutes to choose, right?

    Why is having Parachute Money important?

    The central idea of Parachute Money is to create multiple sources of income so you are not beholden to any one source.

    Picture each source of income as a string on your parachute. The more strings on the parachute, the stronger it is.

    With Parachute Money, if one of your sources of income dries up, you are more than covered with your other sources.

    Likewise, the more sources of income you have, the stronger your personal finances are.

    Parachute Money includes your primary job, any side hustles, any income generating assets, and your emergency savings account. It also includes the income of your significant other, if you share finances.

    The key to Parachute Money: protect yourself with as many investment and income sources as you can.

    That’s why I own stocks and own rental properties.

    Should I buy a rental property or stick with the stock market?

    Lately, I’ve been asking myself this very same question, “Should I look into buying a fifth rental property? Or, should I invest that money in the stock market?”

    There are certainly lifestyle considerations that go into this question beyond just the strength of the investment on paper.

    For example, owning rental properties means taking on a job. On the other hand, investing in the stock market is mostly passive.

    If you’re not ready for the job of being a landlord, then you should stick with investing in stocks.

    Setting lifestyle considerations aside, we all have limited dollars available to invest. And, we work hard for those dollars.

    When we choose to put those hard-earned dollars to work for us, we want to make sure we’re getting a good return on our investment.

    It’s hard enough deciding where to invest your money once you’ve decided on the asset class. Take real estate, for example.

    Even if you know you want to buy a rental property in a specific area, there might be hundreds of potential properties available.

    Picking the right property is not easy and requires some careful analysis.

    How much more difficult does the decision become when you’re not even sure if you should invest in real estate or invest in the stock market?

    That decision can start to feel overwhelming.

    The perfect landing with a parachute indicating the importance of having parachute money through real estate and the stock market.
    Photo by Ali Kazal on Unsplash

    Deciding between various asset classes can feel overwhelming.

    With so many investment choices out there, it can be difficult to choose where to invest your money. That’s why it’s useful to have a way to compare one type of asset class to another.

    Then, you can consider investment opportunities in different assets classes and make informed choices on where to invest.

    Fortunately, we can use two simple metrics to help with this analysis:

    1. Cash on Cash Return on Investment (CoCROI)
    2. Return on Investment (ROI)

    Real estate investors have long used these two metrics to decide if a potential property is a good deal compared to investing in the stock market.

    In our next post, we’ll take a close look at each of these metrics. We’ll learn how each of these metrics can help you compare a rental property investment to typical stock market returns.

    Don’t worry if math is not your favorite thing.

    These two numbers are easy to calculate with an online calculator. The key is to make sure you understand the underlying principles and variables that go into the calculations.

    Are you comfortable investing in rental properties and the stock market?

    I like to invest in rental properties and the stock market to protect myself from economic and life uncertainties.

    I don’t want to be all-in on only one asset class.

    So, I view my rental properties and my stock investments as parachute strings working together to protect me should my airplane start going down.

    Because I’m comfortable investing in both rental properties and the stock market, I need a way to help choose between options across those asset classes.

    In our next post, we’ll learn how to do just that.

    Do you invest in the stock market and in rental properties?

    Which asset class did you invest in first?

    Is part of your reasoning for investing in both asset classes to add layers of protection to your overall finances?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • How to Gain Confidence by Calculating Your Coast FIRE Number

    How to Gain Confidence by Calculating Your Coast FIRE Number

    Have you ever wondered if you really need to keep saving for retirement?

    Believe it or not, you may be closer than you think to achieving your retirement goals.

    That’s a very powerful realization.

    Think about the options you can create for yourself if you no longer need to save a hefty chunk of your paycheck for retirement.

    We recently explored some of these options while talking about the money mindset hack known as Coast FIRE.

    Today, we’ll look at some specific examples of how to calculate your Coast FIRE number so you can see how you stack up.

    By calculating your Coast FIRE number, you may just find that you have more options than you ever thought possible.

    Let’s explore.

    What is Coast FIRE?

    Coast FIRE is a subset of FIRE for people who are not necessarily trying to retire early.

    Instead, the idea is to aggressively fund your retirement accounts early on so you have more options as your career progresses.

    The reason you’ll have options is because once you hit your projected magic retirement number, you no longer need to fund your retirement accounts.

    You can sit back and let compound interest do its thing. Your retirement years are covered.

    With retirement covered, you don’t need to earn as much money. You can focus more attention on your present-day self. That might mean working less hours or working the same amount but in a different job.

    This is the essence of Coast FIRE: knock out retirement planning early on to create more career flexibility later.

    Coast FIRE does not mean complete financial independence.

    When you reach Coast FIRE, you are not financially independent because you still need money coming in to fund your current lifestyle.

    But, you need less money because you no longer need to save for the important goal of retirement. That means you have earned some financial freedom, but not complete freedom.

    That’s OK.

    Remember, the part that separates Coast FIRE from traditional FIRE is that early retirement is not the goal.

    Instead, Coast FIRE means continuing to work until normal retirement age (like age 65) but having more freedom in what you do for work.

    To put a bow on it: the main money mindset benefit of Coast FIRE is that you have options once you’ve already put away enough money for retirement.

    With retirement taken care of, you can:

    1. Switch to a lower paying job or lower stress job.
    2. Become a stay-at-home parent and live off of one spouse’s income.
    3. Start a business.
    4. Grow your side hustle.
    5. Take some time off to think about what you want to do next.

    With Coast FIRE, each of these options feels safer because you’ve already fully funded your retirement.

    Your Coast FIRE number is not the same as your FI number.

    As we’ll explore below, your Coast FIRE number is different from your FI number (what I sometimes refer to as your magic retirement number).

    Your Coast FIRE number is the amount you need saved up today to stop saving anymore for a traditional retirement. You still need to earn money to fund your current lifestyle.

    Your FI number is the amount you need saved up today to retire and live completely off your investments for the rest of your life.

    You’ll see below that your Coast FIRE number is usually significantly lower than your FI number.

    This is especially true the further away you are from traditional retirement age. That’s because you have a longer time horizon for compound interest to do its thing.

    In fact, the reason Coast FIRE is such a powerful money mindset hack is because the Coast FIRE number seems much more attainable.

    This of it like this: have you ever felt that it seems impossible to save millions of dollars for retirement?

    The truth is you don’t have to come up with all that money on your own. Your job is to aggressively seed your retirement accounts early on so compound interest can do the heavy lifting.

    By funding your retirement accounts early in your career, you don’t need millions of dollars. You actually need way less.

    Calculating your Coast FIRE number will drive this point home.

    Bonfire on a coast with mountains in the background indicating the power of calculating your Coast FIRE number.
    Photo by Courtnie Tosana on Unsplash

    How do I calculate my Coast FIRE number?

    There are some great online calculators available to figure out your Coast FIRE number.

    You simply plug in a few variables, like your current age, desired retirement age, and anticipated spending in retirement. It couldn’t be easier.

    The Fioneers and WalletBurst each have easy-to-use calculators that I recommend. There are plenty of others, but these two are simple to use.

    What’s nice about each calculator is that you can play around with the inputs to explore various scenarios. You can also see how your Coast FIRE number is significantly lower than your FI number.

    The WalletBurst calculator has a helpful graph for visualizing your progress towards Coast FIRE.

    The Fioneers calculator has a nice feature where you can input other sources of passive income, like income from a rental property.

    As we know, adding just one rental property to your investment portfolio can massively shrink your magic retirement number and accelerate your journey to financial freedom.

    If you’re thinking about rental property investing to supplement your retirement income, check out my recent post:

    Shrink Your Magic Retirement Number With One Rental Property

    Note: The Fioneers’ calculator is a Google Sheet you can download, but you need to enter your email address first. You do not need to enter an email address to use the WalletBurst calculator.

    Using these calculators, let’s take a look at a few examples.

    Let’s explore three different scenarios where knowing your Coast FIRE number can be very useful:

    1. Clarke is 35-years-old and ready for a new job.
    2. David is 40-years-old and worried about paying for college.
    3. Dorothy is 28-years-old and just paid off her student loans.

    In each of these examples, we’ll assume a standard retirement age of 65 and an annual rate of return of 10% (on par with the historical results of the S&P 500).

    We’ll also factor in a 3% inflation rate (the historical average in the United States).

    Finally, we’ll assume a safe withdrawal rate of 4.7% in light of the updated “4% Rule.”

    In case you missed it, Bill Bengen, creator of the 4% Rule, just released a new book with some fun news for all of us saving for retirement.

    Bengen’s updated research shows that it’s safe to increase your withdrawal rate in retirement from 4% to 4.7%.

    Bengen’s new book is called A Richer Retirement: Supercharging the 4% Rule to Spend More and Enjoy More.

    Let’s dive in.

    Coast FIRE Example 1: Clarke is 35-years-old and ready for a new job.

    Clarke is 35-years-old and is ready for a career change.

    His job at a prestigious law firm has taught him a lot and he’s made good money. But, the stress and the hours are starting to take a toll on his personal life and on his health.

    He’s ready to pivot.

    Because he was making good money, Clarke maxed out his 401(k) retirement plan for the past 8 years. He now has $400,000 saved up. He also currently adds $5,000 to his various retirement accounts each month.

    His goal is to have $200,000 annually to spend in retirement.

    Based on the above variables, Clarke’s Coast FIRE number is $559,009.

    At his current saving rate, he will reach Coast FIRE in three years. That means that at the age of 38, he will no longer need to fund his retirement.

    He could then pursue a lower paying, lower stress job without sacrificing his retirement years.

    Note: Clarke’s FI number (magic retirement number) is significantly higher: $4,255,319.

    That’s a big number and can seem intimidating. His Coast FIRE number is more encouraging to think about.

    Yes, he’ll have to keep working to fund his current lifestyle. But, he can choose to work a lot less.

    What if three years still seems too far away for Clarke?

    Using the Coast FIRE calculator, Clarke learns that if he ups his retirement contributions from $5,000 per month to $8,000 per month, he will achieve Coast FIRE in two years.

    That’s powerful information. If he boosts his saving rate even more, he can pivot even faster.

    Armed with the knowledge of his Coast FIRE number, Clarke has a newfound motivation to stick it out at his current job for just a bit longer.

    two boats near stone island indicating the power of calculating your Coast FIRE number.
    Photo by Jan Tielens on Unsplash

    Coast FIRE Example 2: David is 40-years-old and worried about paying for college.

    David had a kid about a year ago and is freaking out about paying for college. He knows that it’s important to prioritize his own retirement before prioritizing his kid’s college.

    David has $300,000 saved for retirement. His goal is to spend $150,000 annually in retirement. He currently has $6,000 available to invest each month, whether that’s for retirement or college.

    Let’s help David out by using the Coast FIRE calculator.

    Plugging in these variables, we see that David’s Coast FIRE number is $588,029.

    Notice how David’s Coast FIRE number is higher than Clarke’s, even though he plans to spend less in retirement. That’s because he has a shorter time horizon and less currently saved.

    This is another reminder to start investing early and often.

    Even so, David is in great shape for retirement. At his current pace, David is 5 years away from reaching Coast FIRE. His daughter will only be six-years-old at that point.

    That means that David will still have 12 years to prioritize saving for his daughter’s college, all while knowing that his retirement is covered.

    This knowledge makes David feel much better. He’s no longer worried about paying for his daughter’s college at the expense of saving for retirement.

    Coast FIRE Example 3: Dorothy is 28-years-old and just paid off her student loans.

    Dorothy is 28-years-old and is in the early stage of her career as a lobbyist in Washington D.C. She lives with 3 roommates outside of town and keeps her expenses very low.

    Dorothy has her whole life ahead of her so hasn’t thought too much about the specifics of retirement.

    But, she knows enough to think and talk money with her friends and family every once in a while.

    In one of these conversations, she learned about Coast FIRE and was interested in calculating what her number is. Dorothy thought about how amazing it would be to pursue a life on her own terms without worrying about retirement.

    Dorothy just finished paying off her student loans. Because she was focused on her loans, she currently has only $10,000 saved for retirement.

    She now plans to roll the $5,000 per month she had been using for loan payments into her retirement account.

    Because she was so far away from retirement, Dorothy thought it was best to error on the side of caution with her annual spending projections.

    So, Dorothy estimated that she would need $250,000 annually in retirement, much more than both Clarke and David figured.

    Based on the above, Dorothy’s Coast FIRE number is $435,153. She can achieve Coast FIRE by the age of 38!

    Dorothy’s Coast FIRE number is significantly lower than Clarke’s and David’s, even though she plans to spend way more in retirement.

    Of course, this is because she is getting started so early.

    Knowing that she can fund her entire retirement in just 10 years, Dorothy makes it a priority to do so.

    By the age of 38, she will be free to pursue any line of work she chooses without needing another dollar to fund her seemingly extravagant retirement.

    That makes Dorothy very happy.

    Use a Coast FIRE calculator to figure out your own number.

    The above examples show how knowing your Coast FIRE number can be so liberating.

    When you calculate how much you’ll need to retire, you may be surprised at how close you actually are.

    If you’ve been avoiding making big life decisions because of anxiety about retirement, knowing your Coast FIRE number can be a huge help.

    Clarke, David and Dorothy calculated their Coast FIRE numbers and were able to come up with manageable plans.

    Each person is on track for a desirable retirement, all while creating options for themselves earlier in life.

    Having options is a great thing.

    Have you calculated your Coast FIRE number?

    Were you surprised how close you actually are to achieving your retirement goals?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Shrink Your Magic Retirement Number With One Rental Property

    Shrink Your Magic Retirement Number With One Rental Property

    “Wait- how much do I need to save for retirement!?”

    Have you ever felt that way after learning how much money you think you need to retire?

    I’ve certainly felt that way in the past.

    The prospect of saving millions of dollars in order to retire can seem impossible, especially when you’re just starting out.

    You may have even wondered, “How do people even come up with these retirement numbers?”

    The most common answer to that question is the “4% Rule.”

    Using the 4% Rule, you can calculate your magic retirement number and determine how much money you need to save for retirement to maintain your current lifestyle.

    The 4% Rule suggests that you can safely withdraw 4% of your investments in year one of retirement. Then, you can safely withdraw 4% plus an adjustment for inflation in subsequent years. 

    If you do so, you can expect your money to last for 30 years.

    Today, we’ll take it one step further.

    Let’s explore how owning even a single rental property can further reduce the amount you need to save for retirement.

    The results may shock you- in a good way.

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    4% rule plus a rental property=chef’s kiss for retirement #thinkandtalkmoney #rentalproperty #retirementplanning #4percentrule

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    How to use the 4% Rule to forecast your magic retirement number.

    First, let’s look at an example using the 4% Rule to forecast your magic retirement number.

    In some fun news, Bill Bengen, creator of the 4% Rule, just released a new book showing that it’s safe to increase your withdrawal rate in retirement from 4% to 4.7%.

    Bengen’s new book is called A Richer Retirement: Supercharging the 4% Rule to Spend More and Enjoy More.

    If you’re at all interested in FIPE (Financial Independence Pivot Early), Bengen’s book is a must read.

    Bengen’s research is significant because it means you can safely retire with even less money. That’s because the higher your safe withdrawal rate, the less you need squirreled away to maintain your lifestyle.

    In light of Bengen’s updated research, we’ll use 4.7% as our safe withdrawal rate.

    Let’s say that your lifestyle costs you $10,000 per month, or $120,000 per year.

    To figure out how much you would need in investments to cover your current lifestyle for 30 years, divide $120,000 by .047.

    Current Spending / 4.7% (.047) = Magic Retirement Number
    $120,000 / .047 =$2,553,191.49 

    Based on the updated 4.7% Rule, you need $2.55 million to maintain your current lifestyle in retirement.

    By the way, under the original 4% Rule, you would need $3 million in investments ($120,000 / .04 = $3,000,000.00).

    See why people are excited about the updated 4.7% Rule?

    Does saving $2.55 million for retirement seem like an impossible task?

    Saving $2.55 million for retirement may seem like an impossible task.

    If that’s your initial reaction, be sure to check out my ongoing series on investing. We cover everything you need to know to start investing with confidence.

    You may be surprised to learn that If you start investing early and often, reaching $2.55 million is actually not that hard.

    Even so, there’s another way to massively shrink your magic retirement number: owning rental properties.

    Why would anyone want to own rental properties?

    There are four main reasons why I invest in rental properties: 

    1. Monthly cash flow
    2. Appreciation
    3. Debt pay-down
    4. Massive tax benefits

    When these benefits combine, real estate investors can generate significant wealth over the long run.

    decorative lights under a tree at night showing how one rental property can shrink your magic retirement number.
    Photo by Jay on Unsplash

    Before we look at an example of how owning rental properties shrinks your magic retirement number, here’s a quick breakdown of each of the four main benefits. 

    For a more detailed description of each benefit, you can read my series on investing in real estate here.

    1. Rental property cash flow is king.

    With cash flow, you can cover your immediate life expenses. For anybody hoping to reach financial freedom, it is essential to have income to pay for your present day life expenses. 

    For my money, cash flow from rental properties is the best way to pay for those immediate expenses.

    If your present day expenses are already covered, you can use your cash flow to fund additional investments. 

    That might mean buying another rental property or investing in another asset class, like stocks.

    2. Long-term wealth through appreciation.

    Appreciation simply refers to the gradual increase in a property’s value over time. 

    While cash flow can provide for my immediate expenses, appreciation is all about the long-term benefits.

    Like investing in stocks over the long run, real estate tends to go up in value. The key is to hold a property long enough to benefit from that appreciation.

    To benefit from appreciation, all I really need to do is make my monthly mortgage payments, keep my property in decent condition, and let the market do the rest.

    3. With rental properties, other people pay off my debt.

    When I buy a rental property, I take out a mortgage and agree to pay the bank each month until that mortgage is paid off. At all times, I remain responsible for paying back that debt.

    However, I do not pay that debt back with my own money. 

    Instead, I rent out the property to tenants. I do my best to provide my tenants with a nice place to live in exchange for monthly rent payments.

    I then use those rent payments to pay back the loan.

    As my loan balance shrinks, my equity in the property increases. Equity is just another way of saying ownership interest.

    When my equity in a property increases, my net worth increases. 

    4. Real estate investors earn massive taxes benefits.

    When you earn rental income, you must report this income on your tax return. Rental income is treated the same as ordinary income.

    However, the major difference between rental income and W-2 income is that there are a number of completely legal ways to deduct certain expenses from your rental income.

    Common rental property expenses may include mortgage interest, property tax, operating expenses, depreciation, and repairs. We’ll touch on a few of these deductions below.

    With all of these available deductions, the end result is that most savvy real estate investors pay little, or nothing, in taxes on their rental income each year.

    Yes, you read that right.

    I’ll say it again, just to be clear:

    Most savvy real estate investors legally pay nothing in taxes on their rental income each year.

    With these benefits in mind, let’s see what happens when we add a single rental property to your portfolio.

    How owning a single rental property lowers your magic retirement number.

    Let’s continue our example from above where your current lifestyle costs $120,000 per year. We learned that means your magic retirement number is $2.55 million based on the 4.7% Rule.

    Now, let’s add a single rental property into the mix.

    Let’s assume that you own a rental property that cash flows $2,000 per month. That’s a total of $24,000 per year.

    Remember, your cash flow is the profit remaining after paying your mortgage, taxes, insurance, and any other costs.

    To learn how to properly run the numbers on a potential rental property, click here.

    With $24,000 per year generated by your rental property, you don’t need your investment portfolio to fund your entire $120,000 lifestyle.

    Instead, your investments only need to generate $96,000 per year ($120,000 – $24,000 =$96,000).

    So, let’s plug $96,000 into our magic retirement number formula:

    Current Spending / 4.7% (.047) = Magic Retirement Number
    $96,000 / (.047)=$2,042,553.19

    By adding a single rental property to your portfolio, you’ve lowered your magic retirement number by half a million dollars!

    You now only need $2.04 million to maintain your current lifestyle in retirement.

    Macro X-ray of some mushrooms with false coloring showing how to shrink your magic retirement number with one rental property.
    Photo by Mathew Schwartz on Unsplash

    What happens to your magic retirement number if you pay off your mortgage?

    This example shows how your magic retirement number drastically shrinks with the addition of just a single rental property.

    Keep in mind that in this example, we assumed that you have a mortgage on your rental property. That mortgage obviously reduces your cash flow.

    But, what if you paid off that mortgage before you retired?

    Let’s finish our example by assuming that you have a 30-year fixed rate mortgage and your payment is $3,500 per month. And, you make it a goal to pay off that mortgage before you retire.

    Once the mortgage is paid off, you can add that $3,500 to your monthly cash flow.

    That increases your monthly cash flow on this property from $2,000 to $5,500. Annually, that’s $66,000 in cash flow.

    Continuing our example, you now only need your investment portfolio to generate $54,000 per year ($120,000 – $66,000 =$54,000).

    Look what happens when we plug $54,000 into our magic retirement number formula:

    Current Spending / 4.7% (.047) = Magic Retirement Number
    $54,000 / .047 =$1,148,936.17

    By paying off the mortgage on this single property, you’ve now reduced your magic retirement number by $1.4 million dollars!

    You now only need $1.15 million to fund your current lifestyle in retirement.

    Have you considered adding a rental property to your overall investment portfolio?

    The point of this post is to show you how owning even a single rental property can reduce your magic retirement number.

    Think about what would happen if you owned two rental properties. Or, what about three rental properties?

    If you can handle the job of being a landlord- which I’m betting is easier than your job as a lawyer or consultant or doctor- owning rental properties is a great way to accelerate your journey to financial freedom.

    After seeing the math, you may want to consider adding a rental property (or two) to your overall investment portfolio.

    Are you intimidated by the thought of saving enough for retirement?

    Have you done the math with the 4.7% Rule to see how much you really need?

    Have you considered adding a rental property to your portfolio to shrink you magic retirement number?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Is the 4% Rule Actually More Like the 4.7% Rule?

    Is the 4% Rule Actually More Like the 4.7% Rule?

    Bill Bengen, creator of the 4% Rule, just released a new book with some fun news for all of us saving for retirement.

    Bengen’s updated research shows that it’s safe to increase your withdrawal rate in retirement from 4% to 4.7%.

    If you are retiring today, it gets even better. Bengen’s research shows that you can safely withdraw around 5.25%.

    Bengen’s new book is called A Richer Retirement: Supercharging the 4% Rule to Spend More and Enjoy More.

    If you’re at all interested in FIPE (Financial Independence Pivot Early), Bengen’s book is a must read.

    What is the significance of raising the safe withdrawal rate from 4% to 4.7%?

    If you are years away from retirement, you may be wondering, “Why does it matter if you withdraw 4% or 4.7% in retirement?”

    There are two ways to answer that question.

    Number 1: the higher the safe withdrawal rate, the more you can safely spend in retirement without running out of money.

    That sounds fun.

    You know what’s even more fun?

    Number 2: the higher the safe withdrawal rate, the less money you need to save before you can retire.

    That means you may be even closer to retirement than you previously thought.

    That sounds like even more fun, right?

    We’ll take a look at the math in a moment.

    The title of Bengen’s book says it all: “spend more and enjoy more.”

    Here at Think and Talk Money, enjoying our money is one of our primary objectives.

    We are not interested in building the biggest bank accounts just so we look good on a spreadsheet. We are interested in building a life where we are in control.

    That means spending money on what is important to us. It means spending more time with the people who are important to us.

    So, how does a higher safe withdrawal rate help us?

    Let’s explore that by first reviewing the 4% Rule

    What is the 4% Rule?

    The 4% Rule suggests that you can safely withdraw 4% of your investments in year one of retirement. Then, you can safely withdraw 4% plus an adjustment for inflation in subsequent years.

    If you do so, you can expect your money to last for 30 years.

    Without getting too technical, the 4% Rule is based off of research looking at historical investment gains, inflation, and other variables.

    As an example, let’s say you have $1 million in your portfolio.

    According to the 4% Rule, you can safely withdraw $40,000 in year one (4% of your portfolio), then 4% adjusted for inflation in each subsequent year, and not run out of money for 30 years.

    Using the updated “4.7% Rule”, you can safely withdraw $47,000 in year one.

    This simple example shows how you can take your current retirement savings and project the amount you can safely spend so your money lasts 30 years.

    El portero de San Juan FC, Tienes que crear tu propia suerte.-Fabien Barthez, illustrating the importance of having a target like the 4.7% Rule.
    Photo by ÁLVARO MENDOZA on Unsplash

    The 4% Rule also works in reverse. 

    By that I mean you can use the 4% Rule to ballpark how much money you’ll need in retirement to maintain your current lifestyle.

    We’ll look at exactly how to do that below.

    In either case, the 4% Rule is an effective and easy way to start thinking about a magic retirement number.

    How to use the 4% Rule based on your current savings.

    We mentioned above that the 4% Rule works two ways. 

    First, you can take your current retirement savings and calculate how much you can safely spend so your money lasts 30 years.

    If you have $1 million invested, the 4% Rule says you can safely spend $40,000 annually and expect your money to last 30 years.

    Here’s how the math works:

    Current Savings x 4% (.04) = Annual Retirement Spending
    $1,000,000 x .04 =$40,000.00

    Using the 4.7% Rule, the math looks like this:

    $1,000,000 x .047 =$47,000.00

    That’s a useful calculation, especially if you’re nearing retirement age and just want to know how much you can spend each year.

    But, what if you don’t exactly know when you want to retire? 

    Your main priority may not be to retire by a certain age. Instead, your aim may be to retire with enough money to maintain your current lifestyle. You’re determined to continue working for as long as it takes.

    To calculate that magic retirement number, you can once again use the 4% Rule. This time, in reverse.

    How to use the 4% Rule based on your current spending habits.

    The second way to use the 4% Rule is to start with your current spending habits to project how much money you’ll need to maintain that level of spending in retirement. 

    This may seem obvious, but to do so, you’ll first need to know your current spending habits. 

    If you don’t know how much you’re currently spending on a monthly basis, take a look at our budgeting series here.

    The good news is that once you’ve created a Budget After Thinking, this next part is easy.

    To calculate your magic retirement number based on current spending, simply follow these steps:

    1. Add up the amount your’re spending each month in Now Money and Life Money.
    2. Take that number and multiply it by 12 to see how much your lifestyle costs per year. 
    3. Divide that yearly spending by .04

    That’s your magic retirement number.

    Current Spending / 4% (.04) = Magic Retirement Number

    Now, let’s use some real numbers to help illustrate how to use the 4% Rule to project your magic retirement number.

    Here’s how to use the 4% Rule to forecast your magic retirement number.

    Let’s look at an example using the 4% Rule to forecast your magic retirement number.

    Let’s say that you reviewed your Budget After Thinking and learned that you spend $6,000 per month in Now Money and $4,000 per month in Life Money. 

    Combined, that means your lifestyle costs you $10,000 per month, or $120,000 per year.

    To figure out how much you would need in investments to cover your current lifestyle for 30 years, divide $120,000 by .04.

    Current Spending / 4% (.04) = Magic Retirement Number

    Under the original 4% Rule, that means to maintain your current lifestyle of spending $120,000 per year for 30 years, you would need $3 million in investments.

    In other words, your magic retirement number is $3 million.

    a chalkboard with the word possible written on it showing what's possible with the 4.7% Rule.
    Photo by Towfiqu barbhuiya on Unsplash

    If that number seems impossibly high to you, the updated 4.7% Rule should make you feel a little better:

    Current Spending / 4.7% (.047) = Magic Retirement Number
    $120,000 / .047 =$2,553,191.49

    Based on the updated 4.7% Rule, you now only need $2.5 million instead of $3 million to maintain your current lifestyle in retirement.

    That’s fun news.

    Use the 4% Rule as an easy projection tool, not an actual withdrawal rate.

    Whether you want to use the 4% Rule or the updated 4.7% Rule, keep in mind that these are projection tools.

    I view the 4% Rule as a tool to ballpark your magic number, as opposed to a strict withdrawal rate once you actually retire. 

    I point that out because there’s some debate in the personal finance community as to whether 4% is still a safe withdrawal rate in today’s economic environment. 

    For our purposes, I’m not too concerned about that debate.

    Once you get to retirement, your actual withdrawal rate may be higher or lower than 4% depending on a variety of factors. Put another way, you will need to adjust how much you withdraw each year based on factors outside your control.

    Regardless, the 4% Rule is a great way to start thinking about how much you’ll need to save for retirement. Attaching an actual number to your retirement goals is extremely helpful.

    Like Bengen argues in A Richer Retirement: Supercharging the 4% Rule to Spend More and Enjoy More, the point of saving money now is to spend it and enjoy it later.

    For people who are used to saving aggressively during their working years, it can be hard to switch to a spending mindset.

    Whether you’re nearing retirement or still have years to go, A Richer Retirement: Supercharging the 4% Rule to Spend More and Enjoy More will help you find that balance.

    Have you read A Richer Retirement: Supercharging the 4% Rule to Spend More and Enjoy More? What did you think?

    Will you update your retirement planning based on the new 4.7% Rule?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Dreaming About Rental Properties but Ignoring Money Mindset?

    Dreaming About Rental Properties but Ignoring Money Mindset?

    Do you dream about owning rental properties so you can generate semi-passive income while spending more time with your family?

    I want to hear about those dreams. What would you do with that time?

    Travel?

    Exercise?

    Read?

    It’s so motivating for me to learn what you would do with that kind of freedom.

    At the same time, it’s my job to remind you to not ignore key personal finance fundamentals while you’re dreaming about the future.

    When it comes to buying rental properties, this is especially true.

    Let me explain.

    If you’ve been keeping up with the blog, we’ve now learned how to run the numbers on potential real estate deals.

    In fact, I showed you that the analysis is not actually that hard. Your job is simply to account for the fixed costs and make informed predictions for the speculative costs.

    Then, we did the math together on an actual property in my target zone. By using a real example in Chicago, my goal was to further convince you that running the numbers should be easy.

    Finally, we talked about how to evaluate a rental property when the initial math looks bad. The truth is most rental properties are not going to immediately look like great investments. It’s our job as investors to negotiate and look for potential.

    By this point, you may be thinking that buying a rental property sounds great, except for one big problem:

    How are you supposed to come up with the money for a downpayment?

    Great question.

    It’s such a great question that it requires us to take a step back.

    Before evaluating rental properties, you need to evaluate your personal finances.

    It’s no secret that in order to buy a rental property, you first need available money for the downpayment.

    Unless you plan on taking on partners or getting the money from family, coming up with a sufficient downpayment is a major challenge.

    Yes, there are loan options available that require a smaller downpayment. We’ll soon talk about some of those options. I’ve used loans like this in the past.

    Still, a “smaller downpayment” does not mean “no downpayment.”

    So, how can you come up with a downpayment?

    For a downpayment, you need to have available money.

    To have available money, you need a budget that actually works.

    To have a budget that actually works, you need honest, powerful life goals.

    Does this sound familiar?

    It all comes back to money mindset.

    When was the last time you checked in on your money mindset?

    If you take a look at the Think and Talk Money homepage, you’ll see six main category tabs across the top of the page:

    Each one of these categories builds upon the previous categories.

    It all starts with money mindset.

    A strong money mindset is the foundation of the personal finance journey. Maintaining a strong money mindset requires constant and intentional thought.

    wooden boat on blue lake during daytime indicating what you can do with financial freedom.
    Photo by Pietro De Grandi on Unsplash

    I revisit my money mindset every week by taking a quick look at my Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom.

    It may seem overly simplistic, but money mindset is what separates people who reach financial freedom from those who struggle to get ahead in life.

    Don’t believe me?

    Budgeting is really not that hard. We all understand the basic concept: spend less money than you earn. Still, most of us can’t do it.

    The same applies to debt and credit. We all know to avoid debt. We know to use credit responsibly. So, why don’t we do it?

    Investing can seem complicated at first. Is it really that hard? Entire books and websites have been created to show you how to create massive wealth through simple index funds.

    What about buying rental properties? We did the math together. Analyzing deals is not that hard. The impediment for most people is coming up with the money for a downpayment.

    You may be in a similar boat right now. You want to buy a rental property but you’re discouraged because you don’t have the downpayment saved up.

    It’s not just about how much money you make.

    Buying rental properties is not just about how much money you make. Plenty of lawyers and professionals make a lot of money and struggle to come up with any excess money to invest.

    Sadly, the struggles don’t just relate to coming up with money for investments.

    Lawyers as a profession have long struggled with mental health issues. I first learned about these challenges during law school orientation. Today, I see it in practice.

    Being a lawyer is a hard way to make a living. When you work as a lawyer, the hours are intense and stress levels are consistently high.

    In 2023, the Washington Post analyzed data from the U.S. Bureau of Labor to determine what the most stressful jobs are. The study confirmed that lawyers are the most stressed.

    Of course, lawyers are not alone in struggling in this regard due to long, stressful hours.

    The same study showed that people working in the finance and insurance industries were right up there with lawyers as being highly stressed.

    Well, what can we do about it?

    How can we address these struggles?

    Where can we find money for a downpayment?

    I have some thoughts.

    How motivated are you to truly get ahead in life?

    Are you truly motivated to get ahead in life?

    Have you worked on your money mindset and found the motivation to actually create a budget that generates savings?

    If you’ve successfully created a budget and still need to generate more fuel, have you thought about a side hustle?

    When I mention side hustle, is your initial reaction that you’re too busy or important?

    Some lawyers and professionals reading this won’t even allow themselves to consider a side hustle. They automatically think, “I’m way too skilled or busy to even think about another job.” 

    In my personal finance class, we spend a lot of time challenging that notion.

    Very few people- and I mean very few- are too important or too busy to take on a side hustle.

    For most of us, it’s an excuse.

    You may think you’re one of those “too important” people.

    I would challenge you to assess whether you’re confusing “too important” with “too stressed” or “too tired” or “too cool.”

    Is continuing to worry about money really better than spending a few hours a week earning extra money doing something you love?

    Setting that conversation aside, the ideal side hustle is something you enjoy doing that can earn you extra money at the same time.

    Some examples of side hustles my students have come up with in class include:

    • Bartending. Entice your friends to come to your bar by offering cheap drinks. You get to hang out with them and get paid at the same time.
    • Fitness instructor. Instead of paying $48 for the spin class you love, become the instructor and get paid to lead the class.
    • Dog Walker. If you love dogs and don’t currently have one of your own, what better way to fill that void in your life while making money. The same applies to babysitting.
    • Home Baker. Make homemade treats with your kids and sell them to parents who don’t have the time.

    How about this idea for aspiring real estate investors: part-time property manager?

    My wife and I recently needed some help with apartment showings. We reached out to one of our favorite young people in the world to see if she’d be interested.

    A chance to make some money on the side and learn a new skill?

    She jumped on board without hesitation.

    We’ve known her for years and were not the least bit surprised. She’s exactly the type of person who will no doubt be successful in whatever she chooses to do.

    There is always a way to make more money.

    The point is there are always ways to make more money by doing things you like to do anyways. Even if you’re busy. You just have to exert some mental energy to figure out how.

    Then, when you make that extra money, put it to work for you. Make all your hustle worth it.

    At that point, we can talk about investing or buying real estate.

    Unfortunately, most people don’t want to go through this process.

    woman walking on street surrounded by buildings and thinking about own rental properties.
    Photo by Timo Stern on Unsplash

    Too many lawyers and professionals come to me and primarily want to talk about investing or buying real estate.

    They want to skip the foundation and jump right to the more exciting stuff.

    Most of the time, these are people who have never kept a budget. Or, they have massive student loan debt with no real plan to pay it off. Maybe they have a good W-2 job but no other sources of income.

    When I start exploring their situations with them, it’s clear they haven’t thought much about the personal finance building blocks.

    When they mention how hard it is to save for a downpayment, they haven’t considered looking for a new job that pays more or starting a side hustle.

    Before jumping right to owning rental properties, these are the personal finance obstacles that need to be addressed.

    If this sounds like the situation you are in, your ongoing mission is to generate more cash to fuel investments.

    The fun part is once you’ve discovered your motivations and established strong habits, you will consistently have money available so you can invest month after month for the rest of your life.

    My wife and I would not own five properties today if we didn’t first learn personal money wellness. 

    My wife and I would not own five properties (11 rental units) today if we had not first learned money wellness fundamentals.

    I don’t just mean we wouldn’t have had money available to invest, although that is certainly true. 

    I also mean we wouldn’t have the skills and knowledge to successfully run our real estate business.

    If you’ve ever wanted to be a business owner or investor, working on personal finance skills now is critical.

    Robert Kiyosaki put it best in Rich Dad Poor Dad, “It’s not how much money you make. It’s how much money you keep.”

    If you knew someone that made $1,000,000 per year, and at the end of the year, had only invested $20,000, what would your reaction be?

    What if you knew someone who made $100,000 per year and invested $20,000? Did your reaction change?

    How often do you think about your money mindset?

    Do you tend to think more about the “fun stuff” (investing, real estate) than the fundamentals (money mindset, budgeting, debt, etc.)?

    Let us know about your money mindset in the comments below.

  • Does Being Good with Money Make You a Greedy Dragon?

    Does Being Good with Money Make You a Greedy Dragon?

    Have you ever been called a “greedy dragon” before?

    I hadn’t either before this week.

    I recently posted a video on socials talking about how lawyers and professionals should not let leaky toilets prevent them from investing in rental properties.

    Apparently, this video struck a nerve with the trolls.

    I was called a “bottom dweller”, a “demon”, and my personal favorite, a “greedy dragon.”

    I like dragons. So, that last one actually felt like a compliment.

    Why does being good with money wake up the trolls?

    There’s no shortage of internet trolls out there. And, there’s nothing special about me that caught the attention of the trolls this week.

    Haters are going to hate. Trolls are going to troll.

    But, there’s an important money lesson to be learned here thanks to the trolls.

    You see, these are the types of comments you get from people with limiting money beliefs. They’ve never thought about how money can be used as a tool to build a life of purpose.

    Instead, they only think of money as a dangerous weapon to be wielded for evil purposes. They automatically think that people with money are greedy.

    The saddest part is that these people would rather exert their energy attacking people than improving their own situations. These are the type of people who are likely to always be controlled by money, instead of the other way around.

    Now, I’ll give credit to the internet trolls where credit is due. At least these trolls are not hiding their limiting money beliefs.

    That’s a good first step that many of us can benefit from.

    You don’t need to stoop to the level of internet troll to have limiting money beliefs. These kinds of attitudes towards money are way more common than you think.

    One of my main goals in starting Think and Talk Money is for all of us to confront our limiting money beliefs so we can take control of our lives.

    If your relationship with money up to this point has held you back, you’re in the right place by reading this blog.

    Another good idea is to read a good money mindset book.

    A good money mindset book with help you think of your Money Why.

    Money mindset books can help you because they explore the emotional side of money. They will force you to think about money in a way you never have before.

    The best money mindset books don’t just talk about the numbers and math of personal finance. That not only makes the books more interesting to read, it also makes them so much more practical in the real world.

    Personally, I am striving to build the best life possible for my family. To do that, I need to learn more than just the numbers.

    That means I need to be good at not only making money, but also using that money to build a life on my terms. That requires finding a balance, which can be tricky.

    To help strike that balance, I’ve studied how others have done it. Then, I can take what I learn and implement those lessons into my own life. 

    Here are my favorite money mindset books, in no particular order:

    Being on vacation with family gives you plenty of chances to think about your Money Why.

    I highly doubt the average internet troll spends much time thinking about his Money Why.

    I’ve been on vacation recently and have had a lot of reminders of my Money Why. Of course, I’ve known my Money Why since I wrote down my Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom on a beach in 2017.

    Mission Bay Resort pool representing why I want to be good with money to build experiences with my family.
    Photo by Cory Bjork on Unsplash

    My number one goal is to be with my wife and kids as much as I want. The weird part is I wrote down that goal before I was even married or had kids.

    Yes, I want to provide for my family financially. But my Money Why is more than that. I don’t want to just provide money, I want to provide time. I want to be present and share experiences.

    To accomplish that goal, I need to be good with money. 

    If I’m good with my money, I can achieve financial freedom.

    With financial freedom, I can choose how to spend my time. That means I can choose who to spend my time with.

    To the Internet trolls, these goals make you a greedy dragon.

    What do you think?

    Is traveling with three young kids a vacation or just “parenting in a new location?”

    Anyone who’s vacationed with young kids knows that it comes with all sorts of challenges. I’ve heard vacationing with young kids described before as “just parenting in a new location.”

    There’s some truth to that. Figuring out sleeping arrangements, meals, and activities to keep the kids entertained can be a headache. It’s hard not to think that it would have been easier to just stay at home.

    Between the occasional meltdown and the tears, it’s fair to wonder why go through the hassle?

    I’ve had these thoughts creep into my head recently while on vacation with my family.

    Then, I realized why us parents do it.

    It’s to see your five-year-old try over and over again before finally reaching the Little Mermaid diving toy on the bottom of the pool for the first time.

    The pure joy on her face when she popped out of the water with the toy in hand is an image I hope I never forget.

    It’s to watch your three-year-old play with grandma and grandpa and hearing, “Grandpa, close your eyes!” as he completes his next prank to earn an eruption of laughter.

    It’s observing your wife at the playground as she manages a baby in a stroller while simultaneously encouraging her daughter on the swings and helping her son as he climbs too high.

    How she does it, and keeps a smile on her face, I’ll never know.

    It’s the little moments like this that make it all worth it.

    Is being good with money a requirement for these types of memories?

    Nah. But, if being good with money gets me more of these memories, I’m all in.

    It’s important to think about your Money Why regularly.

    Saying that I want to be good with money is not the same thing as saying that I want to be rich.

    Funny enough, people who are good with money oftentimes feel rich regardless of what their net worth is.

    A nice quote I saw at an ice cream shop saying you can't buy me love but you can buy me ice cream meaning you can buy experiences with money.
    Photo by Zoshua Colah on Unsplash

    On the flip side, people who make a lot of money but are not good with money often feel like they’re struggling to get by. As CNBC explained after talking with financial psychologists:

    Whether you’re aiming to save more cash or boost your overall earnings, it’s important to ask yourself what you hope to achieve by obtaining more money, Chaffin says. Otherwise, if you don’t change your internal money beliefs, you may still feel anxious about money even if you hit millionaire status.

    The takeaway is that it is pointless to make money without stopping to think why you want that money and what you’re going to do with it. 

    If you’ve never thought about money that way before, here are three powerful reasons to get you started: 

    1. Money can give you choices.
    2. Money can give you personal power.
    3. Most importantly, money can give you time.

    Money is nothing but a tool that you can manipulate to get what you truly want out of life. The thing is, you have to actually think about what you want if you are going to use that tool effectively.

    Being good with money does not make you greedy.

    Being good with money does not make you a greedy dragon.

    Money is nothing but a tool. You can use that tool to build a life on your terms for you and your family.

    For my money, there’s no better pursuit than that.

    Do you want to be good with money?

    What kind of life are you hoping to build?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Being Good with Money is About Consistent Choices

    Being Good with Money is About Consistent Choices

    Having taught personal finance to law students and young lawyers since 2021, I’ve picked up on a common theme.

    At the conclusion of class, my students tend to be motivated and excited to get good with money.

    This makes sense because we spend a lot of time thinking and talking about what our ideal lives look like. Then, we learn how to use money as a tool to build those lives.

    In the weeks following class, I usually hear from several students who want to follow-up about topics we cover in class, like side hustles or investing in real estate.

    I’ll meet each student for coffee downtown and give them some feedback on their ideas. I love these money talks over coffee.

    My students’ excitement to take control of their money and their lives is contagious.

    Their excitement rubs off on me. I leave these conversations motivated to check in on my own money strategies and goals.

    When our chat is wrapping up, I always encourage my students to keep me posted on their journeys. I invite them to check-in every few months so I can help keep them accountable and to adjust any plans we’ve put in place.

    Unfortunately, less than 10% of my students ever follow-up after these initial meetings.

    After a while, I figured out what was going on.

    See, every now and then, I’ll run into one of these former students at a lawyer event or hanging around the courthouse. I’ll ask them about work and life and eventually about the money plan we talked about.

    That’s when I usually hear something like, “I’m still thinking about that side hustle. I just put it on the back burner for now. I’m going to do it someday.”

    Do you see the problem?

    As a wise man once taught me, “someday” means “no day.”

    a sign that says today is a goo day meaning that someday is no day.
    Photo by Yuliia Martsynkevych on Unsplash

    Financial freedom is about consistent, intentional choices.

    Ask anyone who has reached true financial freedom how they did it, and you’ll pick up on something right away.

    You’ll quickly realize that people who reach financial freedom got there by making consistent, intentional choices with their money.

    They came up with a plan and they stuck with it.

    They didn’t say “some day.”

    Achieving financial freedom is not about being the highest earner or the best investor.

    It’s about consistency.

    There are endless ways to make money. The same goes for investing that money.

    You can reach financial freedom as a lawyer who invests in index funds.

    Just the same, you can be a consultant who owns rental properties.

    Or, an engineer who buys laundromats.

    The point is the avenue you choose to build wealth is less important than the consistency of your choices.

    For example, if you commit yourself to investing 20% of your salary in index funds, you will be well on your way to financial freedom.

    But, if you can’t follow through on your plan for more than a few months, you’re never going to get there.

    Of course, we’ve all experienced this tendency in various areas of life. The easiest examples to think of relate to fitness and healthy eating.

    How many of us have said we’re going to commit to working out five days a week or eating vegetables every meal, only to give up after a couple months?

    It’s not that we want to give up, just that the rest of life gets in the way. We tell ourselves that we’ll return to healthy living someday, which actually means no day.

    When it comes to your money choices, don’t let the rest of life get in the way. Money is such a powerful tool when wielded properly and consistently.

    Don’t waste this powerful tool.

    To help make consistent choices, think about why money matters.

    To help you make consistent money choices, the first step is to think about a simple and powerful question: why does money matter?

    For me and many others, money is about financial independence, which translates to the power to choose.

    When we have the power to choose, we have the power to live a life that conforms to our personal values. That means we can live on purpose, not on auto-pilot.

    What does it mean to live on purpose?

    It means that we can choose to spend our working hours doing what is meaningful to us. It means we can choose to spend more time with the people who are meaningful to us.

    My favorite part during my personal finance for lawyers class is when my students share their motivations with each other. We all learn so much from these honest conversations.

    It’s why I believe talking about money is so important. We all benefit from knowing that we’re not alone in our money worries. We can be inspired by hearing what our friends want from their money and their lives.

    The more you think and talk about why you want to be good with money, the clearer your motivations will become.

    To help you get started, here are three powerful reasons why I want to be good with money:

    1. Money can give you choices.

    This may seem obvious, but when you have money, you have choices.

    You can choose where to live. You can choose who you work for or can work for yourself. On a daily level, you can choose how you eat, exercise, relax, and travel.

    This holds true whether you make $50,000 or $250,000. Of course, your options may be different. The point is that when you’ve made good money choices, you’ll at least have options.

    2. Money can give you personal power.

    This is another way to say that money gives you control of your life situation.

    If you are in a bad relationship, a bad job, or just need a change, money gives you the personal power to do something about it. When you don’t have money, you may be stuck.

    3. Money can give you time.

    When you have enough money to be truly financially independent, you have earned the freedom to do whatever you want with your time.

    As I mentioned earlier, you can spend your working hours at a job that is meaningful to you. And, you can spend more time with people who are meaningful to you.

    It’s been said many times, “time is our most precious resource.”

    When you have money, you can buy your time back.

    woman in white long sleeve shirt reading book on beach during daytime because she is financially free and bought her time back.
    Photo by Constantin Panagopoulos on Unsplash

    What would you do with financial freedom?

    Years ago, I asked myself this important question. I wrote down my answer and called it my Tiara Goals.

    If you haven’t ever actively thought about what you would do with financial freedom, now’s the time to do so. It is extremely motivating.

    Even when you feel like financial freedom is only a distant dream for you, it’s important to actively think about what you want out of life.

    I’d even suggest that the further away you feel from financial freedom, the more important it is to think about what it would mean for you.

    When you’re at your lowest point, visualizing what you would do with financial freedom is a helpful escape.

    Don’t forget to write down whatever you come up with.

    Here are my 7 Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom:

    1. Be with my wife and kids as much as I want. Dad never missed a game. Mom never missed a game. Nana never missed a game.
    2. Not be forced to commute to work on Friday or Tuesday or whatever day, if I need that day for myself.
    3. Choose how to spend my working hours (representing clients, teaching, volunteering, building a business, etc.).
    4. Continue to study and learn constantly.
    5. Take at least one big trip every year.
    6. Never turn down an exciting or smart opportunity because I can’t afford it.
    7. Work alongside people that value my contributions. 

    Keep in mind that I wrote these goals before I had kids and before I was even married. This was also years before the pandemic when working from home was a foreign concept to most of us. 

    I think it says a lot that I was thinking about these things way back then.

    Being consistent means thinking just a little bit about money every week.

    My goal is to help you think even a little bit about your money choices every week. That way, your money life remains in balance with the rest of your life, and you can continually evolve and adapt your choices as your life changes.

    I want to encourage you to think, and to talk, and to choose. If all I do is help you and your loved ones think more purposefully about your money, Think and Talk Money will be a success. 

    Maybe your goal is also financial independence, or the power to choose and to live on purpose.

    Maybe it’s something else entirely. Whatever it is, discovering your motivation is the crucial first step. 

    It’s so important that I’ll encourage you to think about that motivation every week.

    I’ve learned that money is something that we all need to think about as a regular part of our lives. Not that we should only think about money. Or that we need to obsess over money. Simply that we can’t ignore money. 

    How sad is it when we realize our hard earned money has just vanished? That at the end of each month, we have less money?

    If this sounds familiar, you’re not alone. There are a lot of smart people who need somewhere to turn learn about money. Or, maybe just a reminder to actively think about their money. 

    You don’t have to struggle with making continuous money choices alone.

    Most of us could use someone to talk to or something to read to help us learn about personal finance.

    I hope Think and Talk Money can be that place for you.

    I can’t, and won’t, tell you what to do with your money. It’s your life, after all. But, I will strive to help you think and talk with purpose about your money.

    The basic money concepts are easy enough to understand. Consistently making good choices is hard. 

    Most of us could ace a quiz that asked, “Is it a good idea to spend more money than you earn every month and plummet deeper and deeper into debt?”

    Knowing what to do is not the same as actually doing it. Remember, someday is no day.

    That’s why it helps to not be afraid to talk about money. For some reason, most of us choose to deal with money on our own. I’d like to change that.

    There’s a stigma that we shouldn’t talk about money. I’d like to change that, too.

    That way, we all have a better chance of making intentional, consistent choices with our money.

    Have you been excited about money in the past only to lose that excitement not long after?

    Have you tried talking about money with your friends and family to help you stay motivated? If not, what is holding you back?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Your Spouse is the Most Important Person on Your RE Team

    Your Spouse is the Most Important Person on Your RE Team

    If you’re considering your first rental property, don’t fool yourself into thinking you’ll be earning passive income.

    The bottom line is owning rental properties is a job. It’s not a full-time job. It’s not even a regular, part-time job. But, it is a job.

    There will be tenant issues, work orders, money spent, and tough decisions to be made like in any other business.

    For me, the benefits of owning rental properties significantly outweigh the downsides of being a landlord. It’s a tradeoff that I would happily make again and again.

    But, I wouldn’t be saying that if my wife wasn’t also fully committed.

    Before you buy a rental property, I encourage you to talk to your spouse first. Make sure you both are on the same page. 

    No, you do not have to have an equal division of labor. 

    Yes, you each have to commit to the good and the bad that comes along with owning rental properties.

    If you both can make that commitment, you have the best shot at owning your properties for a long time and reaching that ultimate goal: financial freedom.

    Before building out the rest of your real estate team, get on the same page with your spouse.

    Owning rental properties should not be a solo adventure. The entire experience is better when you have someone to share it with.

    Isn’t that true for most things in life?

    Whether it’s a project you’re working on or a vacation you’re taking, it’s better when you do it with other people.

    Owning rental properties is no different.

    In fact, the most successful rental property investors have a team of professionals working with them.

    Having a good team in place will help you avoid mistakes and stay motivated so you can keep your properties long-term.

    It’s not an exaggeration to say that having the right people on your team can make or break your investing experience.

    I’ve seen too many investors sell their rental properties after a couple of years because they didn’t have the right people on their team. They end up making preventable mistakes and give up because being a landlord is too hard.

    Unfortunately, that means they give up their properties long before getting the benefits from cash flow, appreciation, debt pay-down, and tax advantages.

    If you’re going to take on the challenge of being a landlord, you might as well hold your properties long enough to reap the benefits.

    And, you should take all the help you can get along the way.

    There is plenty to say about building out your real estate team. And soon enough, we’re going to talk about the key professionals that can help you run your rental property business successfully.

    But, that’s all for another day.

    Before we get to any of that, we need to talk about the single most important member of your team:

    Your spouse.

    The same holds true whether you have a significant other, partner, girlfriend, boyfriend, or anyone else you share your life wife.

    Don’t worry about analyzing the numbers and finding the perfect deal. The rest of your team came wait.

    Start with your spouse.

    Here’s why.

    Your spouse is the single most important person on your team.

    To be a successful rental property investor, your spouse needs to be on board.

    Even if you are going to be the one actively running the business, you won’t get very far if your spouse is not as committed as you are.

    Before anything else, the first thing you need to do is sit down with your spouse and talk about why you really want to own rental properties.

    That’s because owning rental properties is all about commitment.

    It’s a financial comment, a time commitment, and most of all, an emotional commitment.

    With these kinds of commitments involved, it’s essential that your spouse understands the full scope of what you’re both getting into as rental property investors.

    Here’s what I mean.

    Walking down a remote road near Reykjavik, Iceland indicating that investing in real estate takes a team, the most important person being your spouse or partner.
    Photo by Rod Long on Unsplash

    Owning rental properties is a financial commitment.

    This one should be obvious. Owning rental properties is a major financial commitment. It takes capital to buy properties and capital to maintain them.

    When you choose to invest your hard-earned money in rental properties, that means you’re not spending that money elsewhere.

    That might mean sacrificing retirement savings. It could also mean having less money to spend on your dream home. Or, less money to spend on vacations.

    The point is that before you make the financial commitment, your spouse needs to be on board with why you’re making these sacrifices.

    I’m fortunate that my wife and I have been on the same page with our rental properties since Day 1. Neither one of us needed any convincing once we did our homework and learned what was possible.

    Today, we both understand why we’re still doing it: owning rental properties speeds up our journey to financial freedom.

    It took some major financial sacrifices to get here, but we made those sacrifices together.

    As the most obvious example, we delayed buying our “forever home” until I was almost 40 and we already had two kids.

    Instead of buying a home in a nice neighborhood to raise our kids, we used our savings to buy rental properties. We were doing something different and it was important to be committed to our plan.

    It wasn’t easy to see our friends and family members buy beautiful homes in wonderful areas. We definitely noticed more than a few confused looks when we would have people over to our small apartments in the city.

    At times, we both wondered whether we were making a mistake.

    As it turned out, the trade-off was well worth it.

    Owning rental properties is a time commitment.

    Make no mistake about it, owning rental properties is a time commitment.

    We’ve talked about how owning rental properties means having a job. For lawyers and professionals, this means having a second job on top of a primary job. 

    Even with the best team and systems in place, there’s no getting around the fact that owning rental properties will always be a time commitment.

    What does the time commitment look like? What does this have to do with your spouse?

    Depending on your availability and skills, the time commitment will vary from one landlord to the next.

    You might be the type that heads over to the property every weekend to mow the lawn. To take it one step further, maybe you’re the type who has the skills to handle all maintenance requests yourself.

    Or, you might handle all showings and tenant issues personally.

    The truth is that in the beginning, many rental property investors do all of the above themselves.

    Rental property investors think of this time commitment as “sweat equity.”

    Sweat equity is what you contribute to your business but don’t exactly get paid for. When cash flow is tight, as it is for most beginners, we make up for it with sweat equity.

    The more jobs we take on ourselves, the less we pay out to other people.

    The tradeoff is that the more sweat equity you put into your properties, the less time you have to spend at home with your spouse.

    If your spouse is not on board with you being away from home, it’s going to be difficult to succeed as a rental property investor.

    If you have young kids, it’s even harder. When one spouse is at the rental property, the other spouse is usually alone with the kids. Anyone with kids knows which of those two jobs is harder.

    For example, there have been entire weekends that I’ve spent fixing up one apartment or another.

    By the way, if you’ve ever wanted to take a tour called “The World’s Worst Drywall Repairs,” I’ve got you covered.

    If it’s not repairs eating up your free time, it could be analyzing new properties, doing apartment showings, meeting with contractors, or basic bookkeeping.

    With all these time commitments, I’m lucky that my wife and I are on the same page when it comes to our rental property business. We split up these tasks and cover for each other when one person is busy with other responsibilities.

    Yes, you can outsource these jobs. We outsource as much as we can. But, there are certain jobs that you’ll always need to, or want to, handle yourself.

    real estate team meeting near a transparent glass indicating the importance of having the right people on your team before you buy rental properties.
    Photo by Charles Forerunner on Unsplash

    As just one example, we do all our showings ourselves.

    Finding the right tenants is the most important job in owning rental properties. If we outsourced this particular job, we could end up with tenants who could cause us major stress for the next year.

    Regardless of the recipe that works for you and your spouse, have the conversation before investing in rental properties.

    Make sure you each understand the time commitment involved.

    Owning rental properties is an emotional commitment.

    The financial commitment and the time commitment are only the beginning.

    Most of all, owning rental properties is an emotional commitment.

    Without having a spouse on the same emotional wavelength as you, it will be very hard to succeed as a rental property investor.

    When you own rental properties, there will be stressful times and you’ll want to lean on your spouse for support.

    There will also be moments to celebrate, and you’ll want to share those moments with your spouse.

    If your spouse is not on the same wavelength as you, these moments can feel very lonely. The lows can feel much lower and the highs don’t feel quite so high.

    Without someone to commiserate with and celebrate with, you’ll be more likely to give up.

    My wife and I have endless stories about our experiences as landlords that very few other people would truly appreciate. We can each list off the jerks we’ve rented to and the biggest headaches we’ve encountered.

    We once offered a lease renewal to a tenant at her same price. She responded that she would be happy to stay for another year if we simply replaced the kitchen countertops and appliances, added an additional bedroom and built out some new closets.

    Ummm, we’ll pass.

    My wife and I can laugh about these moments because we’re both emotionally committed to the journey. Living through these experiences together has helped us stay the course.

    Unfortunately, I’ve met a number of real estate investors over the years who tried to go it alone. I think that’s a mistake. Oftentimes, these investors don’t stay invested very long.

    It’s not because they bought bad properties or had bad tenants.

    The problem was they never prioritized the most important person on their real estate team.

    When challenges arose, they didn’t have a spouse to lean on.

    When you’re spouse is on board, investing in real estate is a rewarding challenge.

    It’s all about the journey, right?

    When times get tough in our real estate business, my wife and I lean on each other. When we miss out on evenings with the kids or nights out with friends, we remind each other what it’s all about.

    We remind each other that we wouldn’t be where we are today if we didn’t start buying rental properties in 2018.

    We both realize the commitments involved, whether it be our money, our time, or our emotions. If we weren’t in this together, there’s no way we could run our rental property business as well as we do.

    Before you buy a rental property, I encourage you to talk to your spouse first. Make sure you both are on the same page. 

    No, you do not have to have an equal division of labor. 

    Yes, you each have to commit to the good and the bad that comes along with owning rental properties.

    If you both can make that commitment, you have the best shot at owning your properties for a long time and reaching that ultimate goal: financial freedom.

    Did you talk to your spouse before buying rental properties?

    Do you run your rental property business with your spouse?

    What lessons have you learned along the way?

  • Fix Your Personal Finances Before Investing in Real Estate

    Fix Your Personal Finances Before Investing in Real Estate

    When my students ask me a question about how to start investing in real estate, I tend to respond with a question of my own:

    “How much savings does your personal budget generate each month?”

    Yes, I know. It’s so annoying to answer a question with a question.

    This particular question usually leads to a double dose of annoyance from my students.

    My students are first annoyed that I ignored their question about real estate. They didn’t come to me to talk about something boring, like budgeting. They want to know about the exciting stuff, like becoming a real estate investor.

    What I’ve noticed is that after this initial annoyance fades away, another form of annoyance sets in. My students get annoyed because they can’t actually answer the question.

    They realize they have no idea how much money they’re saving each month because they don’t have a personal budget.

    That’s a problem.

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    Investing in real estate means running a business. Money comes in and money goes out. To be successful, you have to make sure that more money comes in than goes out. The same logic applies to your personal budget: if you want to get ahead in life, more money needs to come in than goes out. #thinkandtalkmoney #realestateinvesting #realestateinvestor #personalfinance

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    Not having a personal budget is a problem for anyone who wants to be a successful real estate investor.

    Investing in real estate means running a business. Money comes in and money goes out. To be successful, you have to make sure that more money comes in than goes out.

    This is obvious stuff, right?

    The same logic applies to your personal budget: if you want to get ahead in life, more money needs to come in than goes out.

    The problem is most people have a hard enough time managing their personal finances. How are they going to handle managing business finances?

    That’s why I ask my students, “If you haven’t mastered this idea with your personal budget, are you sure you want to take on the stress and risk of an investment property?”

    It would be much easier to simply invest in an index fund, like VTSAX. At least in that case, you don’t have to manage a business budget. You just have to do your best to constantly add money to your investment account.

    It’s usually around this point when my students start nodding in understanding.

    Before investing in real estate, make sure your personal finances are in order.

    My goal here is not to dissuade you from investing in real estate. I am a big proponent of rental property investing.

    I’ve said it before: I think every professional or lawyer can benefit from owning rental properties.

    My only goal is to help you avoid the mistakes that crush so many beginner real estate investors. One of the biggest mistakes I see is people taking on a major financial commitment (and time commitment) without starting from a strong foundation.

    If you’ve been following along on the blog, you likely noticed the progression in topics we’ve covered.

    You’ll see links to each one of these topics featured on the top of the Think and Talk Money homepage:

    We initially covered each of those topics in order from top to bottom. First, we talked extensively about the mental side of money. Without having your money mindset in the right place, nothing else matters.

    We then spent a lot of time talking about personal finance fundamentals, like budgeting, saving, and handling credit and debt responsibly.

    Only after having our personal finance foundation in place did we talk about more fun concepts like investing and real estate.

    There’s a reason we’ve covered these topics in this order.

    If your money mindset is not in the right place, you won’t be able to stay on budget.

    If you can’t stay on budget, you’ll likely fall into debt.

    When you’re falling deeper and deeper into debt, it doesn’t make a lot of sense to prioritize investing.

    A woman holding a jar with savings written on it suggesting you need to get your personal finances in order before investing in real estate.
    Photo by Towfiqu barbhuiya on Unsplash

    Why bother with real estate if any profits are just going to disappear?

    Let’s focus on that last point for a minute.

    What sense does it make to invest if you’ve never proven to yourself that you can use those investment gains responsibly?

    I never want to see people take on the challenge of investing in real estate just to have any profits disappear because they don’t have a strong personal finance foundation in place.

    Imagine someone does the work to find and sustain a good rental property that generates $1,000 per month in cash flow.

    It’s not easy to earn that much. It takes time and effort, not to mention the risk involved.

    If that same person blows the $1,000 he earned on things he doesn’t care about, what was the point?

    Why take on the risk and do the work if the money will all be gone by the end of the month?

    Unfortunately, this is how many people go through life. They work hard, make good money, and then have nothing to show for it.

    I don’t want that to be your fate. I want you to have a plan for your money before you earn it.

    That means sticking to a budget that consistently moves you closer to living freely on your terms.

    Most of us don’t know where our next dollar is going.

    The reason most people never get ahead with their finances is because they don’t have a plan for where their next dollar is going.

    Their income hits their checking account, they spend it on this or that, and pretty soon that money has disappeared. They haven’t used the money to advance any of their priorities. It’s just gone.

    To me, this is one of the most important money mistakes that we need to fix right away. We definitely need to fix it before we take a chance on investing in real estate.

    If not, you’ll just be making the same mistakes, just with more money to lose.

    Having a plan for our money, before we earn it, is essential if we want to reach our goals. With a plan, we can eliminate the disappearing dollars with confidence that our money is being used to serve our purposes.

    How do you create a plan for your money before you earn it?

    You need to have a budget.

    If you don’t currently have a budget that results in excess money at the end of each month, I encourage you to start there before thinking bout real estate.

    How to create a Budget After Thinking.

    The key to budgeting is to eliminate disappearing dollars by creating a plan for Now Money, Life Money, and Later Money.

    Your Later Money is what you’ll eventually use to accelerate your journey to financial freedom by investing in stocks or buying real estate.

    1. Now Money

    Now Money is what you need to pay for basic life expenses.

    These expenses include housing, transportation, groceries, utilities (like internet and electricity), household goods (like toilet paper), and insurance.

    These are expenses that you can’t avoid and should be relatively fixed each month.

    2. Life Money

    Life Money is what you are going to spend every month on things and experiences in life that you love.

    This bucket includes dining out, concerts, vacations, subscriptions, gifts, and anything else that brings you joy. 

    We can’t be afraid to spend this money. This bucket is usually what makes life fun and exciting. The key is to think and talk so you are spending this money consistently on things that matter to you.

    3. Later Money

    Later Money is what you are saving, investing, or using to pay off debt.

    This bucket includes long term goals, such as retirement plan contributions (like a 401k or Roth IRA), college savings for your kids (like a 529 plan), emergency savings and paying off student loan or credit card debt.

    This bucket also includes any shorter term goals, like saving for a wedding or a downpayment for a house. 

    Most fun of all, this bucket includes any investments you make to more quickly grow your wealth, like investing in real estate or the stock market.

    Later Money is the key category that fuels your ultimate life goals, like financial independence. The more you fuel this category, the faster you can reach your goals.

    black smartphone calculator showing the number 0 indicating how to budget with two simples numbers before investing in real estate.
    Photo by Kelly Sikkema on Unsplash

    When you have strong fundamentals in place, money becomes fun.

    Being good with money doesn’t have to be stressful. Once you have the fundamentals in place, you’ll start to see how each dollar you earn gets you one step closer to financial freedom.

    Before you think about investing in real estate, make sure that your personal finances are in order.

    Owning rental properties means running a business. When the money comes in, you want to make sure it doesn’t go right out.

    Otherwise, the effort, stress, and risk of owning real estate is not worth it. Any dollar you earn is likely to disappear as quickly as it comes in.

    To prevent that from happening, establish good money habits before you buy real estate.

    In the end, you’ll be so happy that you did.

    For any real estate investors out there, did you jump in before establishing strong personal money habits first?

    What advice would you have for beginners thinking about investing in real estate?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Why do You Really Want to Own Rental Properties?

    Why do You Really Want to Own Rental Properties?

    Before you start doing something, figure out why you’re doing it.

    Someone smart probably said that at some point, right?

    We’ve spent a lot of time recently talking about the main reasons why I invest in rental properties. We’ve also talked about the work involved with owning rental properties.

    I’m a big believer in the power of real estate. I’ve also come to appreciate just how much work is involved in owning rental properties.

    The reason I’ve spent so much time writing about the benefits and the work involved is to make sure you know exactly what you’re getting yourself into.

    Once you fully understand and appreciate the benefits and the work involved, you’re ready for the next step:

    Think and talk about why you want to own rental properties.

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    No city fines this time! #thinkandtalkmoney #landlord #landlordtips #realestateinvesting

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    Depending on why you want to own rental properties, your strategy may be different than mine or someone else’s strategy.

    The key is to figure out your “Why” before making costly mistakes, in terms of both money and time, that don’t help advance your goals.

    Don’t skip this crucial step and jump right to analyzing deals.

    The last thing you want to do is take on such a big commitment without truly knowing why you’re doing it.

    To help you start thinking about a strategy, let’s review the benefits and also the work involved in owning rental properties.

    You can read much more in my series on real estate here.

    1. Rental property cash flow is king.

    With cash flow, you can cover your immediate life expenses. For anybody hoping to reach financial freedom, it is essential to have income to pay for your present day life expenses. 

    For my money, cash flow from rental properties is the best way to pay for those immediate expenses.

    If your present day expenses are already covered, you can use your cash flow to fund additional investments. 

    That might mean buying another rental property or investing in another asset class, like stocks.

    2. Long-term wealth through appreciation.

    Appreciation simply refers to the gradual increase in a property’s value over time. 

    While cash flow can provide for my immediate expenses, appreciation is all about the long-term benefits.

    Like investing in stocks over the long run, real estate tends to go up in value. The key is to hold a property long enough to benefit from that appreciation.

    To benefit from appreciation, all I really need to do is make my monthly mortgage payments, keep my property in decent condition, and let the market do the rest.

    Blue and orange apartment symbolizing that you need to know your strategy before buying rental property
    Photo by Brandon Griggs on Unsplash

    3. With rental properties, other people pay off my debt.

    When I buy a rental property, I take out a mortgage and agree to pay the bank each month until that mortgage is paid off. At all times, I remain responsible for paying back that debt.

    However, I do not pay that debt back with my own money. 

    Instead, I rent out the property to tenants. I do my best to provide my tenants with a nice place to live in exchange for monthly rent payments.

    I then use those rent payments to pay back the loan.

    As my loan balance shrinks, my equity in the property increases. Equity is just another way of saying ownership interest.

    When my equity in a property increases, my net worth increases. 

    4. Real estate investors earn massive taxes benefits.

    When you earn rental income, you must report this income on your tax return. Rental income is treated the same as ordinary income.

    However, the major difference between rental income and W-2 income is that there are a number of completely legal ways to deduct certain expenses from your rental income.

    Common rental property expenses may include mortgage interest, property tax, operating expenses, depreciation, and repairs. We’ll touch on a few of these deductions below.

    With all of these available deductions, the end result is that most savvy real estate investors pay little, or nothing, in taxes on their rental income each year.

    Yes, you read that right.

    I’ll say it again, just to be clear:

    Most savvy real estate investors legally pay nothing in taxes on their rental income each year.

    Do not own rental properties if you want passive income.

    Now that you know the benefits, let’s highlight just how much work is involved in owning rental properties.

    At one point or another, you may have heard someone say, “I want to invest in rental properties for some passive income.”

    Yes, we all want passive income.

    No, investing in rental properties is not passive.

    Think of owning rental properties as a way to earn “semi-passive” or “partially-passive” or “somewhat-passive” income.

    Don’t think of owning rental properties as a way to earn “passive” income.

    If you want passive income, you should be investing in index funds, like VTSAX. For more on investing in the stock market, you can check out my series on investing here.

    For me, the benefits of owning rental properties significantly outweigh the downsides of being a landlord. It’s a tradeoff that I would happily make again and again.

    How does the old saying go? “If it were easy, everybody would do it.”

    Being a landlord is not easy. It’s definitely not for everyone.

    But, then again, neither is financial freedom.

    In the end, if you are willing to put in the effort, owning rental properties will accelerate your journey to financial freedom.

    Do you still want to own rental properties after knowing the benefits and the work involved?

    Now, you know the main benefits and the work involved with owning rental properties.

    Like I said, owning rental properties is not for everyone. It takes time and effort to learn the basics.

    Then, it takes more time and effort to do your research and develop a strategy.

    At some point, you’ll need to take a chance and make a purchase. That means putting your hard-earned dollars at risk.

    None of this will be easy.

    But, it sure is a lot of fun.

    And, there is a lot of upside.

    If you still want in, I’m going to help you get started.

    for rent sign in window reflecting that all rental property investors need other know their why before they start buying.
    Photo by Aaron Sousa on Unsplash

    Ask yourself: what are my main goals in owning rental properties?

    Before you start analyzing deals, you need to think long and hard about what your goals are.

    Depending on what your’e trying to accomplish, your strategy is going to be different.

    For example, are you looking to move to an expensive neighborhood and just want to offset your ownership costs?

    You may benefit from owning a home with a coach house, granny flat, or garden unit. You can then live in the primary unit and rent out the second unit to reduce your monthly costs.

    Or, your goals might be to leave full-time employment and use rental property cash flow to fund your life. In that case, you’ll need a property that generates significant cash flow, possibly at the expense of personal comfort or long-term gains.

    On the other hand, you may love your job and have no plans of leaving anytime soon. You’re not concerned about present day cash-flow. Instead, you’re looking for long-term gains through appreciation, debt pay-down, and tax benefits.

    In this scenario, you may target markets that have shown strong growth but don’t necessarily cash flow.

    These are just a few possible considerations. One of the things I love most about investing in real estate is how many options there are. It’s up to you to decide what options are most attractive for your goals.

    This is why the first step is to think and talk about why you want to own rental properties.

    Don’t ignore this first step. Spend some serious time thinking about what you’re trying to accomplish.

    Because different properties may offer different benefits, you need to commit to a strategy before you start worrying about how to analyze specific deals.

    Too many beginner investors skip this step and realize much too late that a property they bought doesn’t help achieve their goals.

    My goal in owning rental properties is to accelerate my journey to financial freedom.

    My wife and I invest in rental properties in Chicago and Colorado to accelerate our journey to financial freedom.

    In order to be truly financially free, we need cash flow to cover our present day expenses. So, we’ve targeted properties in Chicago that generate strong monthly cash flow.

    Don’t get me wrong, we certainly hope to benefit from appreciation, debt pay-down and tax advantages. That’s why we’ve chosen to invest in neighborhoods that we think are only getting better.

    However, we view those long-term gains as more of a bonus. Our focus with our Chicago properties is on present day cash flow.

    On the other hand, our Colorado property is a long-term play. It does not generate positive cash flow. That said, we use the rental income to help offset our ownership costs.

    We are planning to keep our Colorado condo in our family for decades to come. Offsetting the ownership costs with rental income will help us accomplish that goal.

    At the same time, we are hoping that our Colorado condo appreciates in value, making it a solid long-term investment. So, even though it does not generate cash flow for us, it still fits into our long-term plans for financial freedom.

    One key point: just because my wife and I invest for cash flow doesn’t mean we are planning on leaving full-time employment.

    I am a big proponent of all lawyers and professionals having multiple streams of income. I refer to these various income streams as Parachute Money.

    Because my wife and I are earning steady paychecks, we’ve been able to use our cash flow for other investments. We have multiple income streams and are putting all those income streams to work. That’s one reason we’ve been able to scale our portfolio so quickly.

    What are your goals in owning rental property?

    You now know the benefits, the work involved, and some different strategies to consider regarding rental properties.

    Now, it’s time to ask yourself why you want to own rental properties.

    Once you figure out the “why,” you can then move onto the “how.”

    So, if you’re considering owning rental properties, what is your why?

    What goals are you trying to accomplish?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Invest in Real Estate and Other People Pay Your Debt

    Invest in Real Estate and Other People Pay Your Debt

    Imagine that you have the chance to own something that might be worth a lot of money down the road.

    To buy this thing, you will need to pay 25% of the purchase price. The other 75% of the price will be paid by someone else.

    Your job is to take care of that thing and keep it for a long time. It won’t be easy, but if you can handle it, you’ll wake up years from now owning something outright that is very valuable.

    So far, this sounds pretty good, right?

    Of course, there’s a catch. That person paying for 75% of the item will want to be paid back. He’ll want to earn interest, too.

    You might be thinking that this opportunity doesn’t sound so promising anymore. Having to pay off that debt might be enough to convince you not to move forward with buying this thing.

    You’re smart to be thinking about the debt. I could understand if the prospect of paying back a debt like this didn’t appeal to you. Who really wants to use their own hard-earned money to pay off debt anyways?

    Fair enough.

    But, what if I told you that other people are going to pay back that 75% (plus interest) on your behalf?

    Even more, while those other people are paying back the debt, you still get to benefit from owning the item.

    Does that change how you’re viewing this opportunity?

    Maybe now you’re thinking that this is too good to be true?

    Nope.

    This is exactly how real estate investors generate long-term wealth. They buy a property using a loan and then pay back that loan using other people’s money.

    This example leads us to the next main reason I invest in real estate:

    Other people pay off my debt.

    When you acquire the right rental properties, your tenants will pay monthly rent and that rent can be used to pay off your loan.

    That means you can pay off that loan without using any of your own money.

    As your loan balance shrinks, your net worth increases. As your net worth increases, you are creating wealth for you and your family.

    Along the way, you can reap the benefits of monthly cash flow and appreciation. That means your net worth increases even more.

    That’s a powerful combination to generate long-term wealth.

    If this concept sounds like something you may be interested in, read on.

    Before we talk more about debt pay-down, let’s review two of the other main reasons I invest in real estate.

    1. Rental property cash flow is king.

    With cash flow, you can cover your immediate life expenses. For anybody hoping to reach financial freedom, it is essential to have income to pay for your present day life expenses. 

    For my money, cash flow from rental properties is the best way to pay for those immediate expenses.

    One of the hottest destinations in Spain is Costa Blanca, these luxury homes are situated in Villamartin, Campoamor, Torrevieja, Orihuela, located near to the coast, golf course, and shopping center, an example of other people paying my debt through rent.
    Photo by Frames For Your Heart on Unsplash

    If your present day expenses are already covered, you can use your cash flow to fund additional investments.

    That might mean buying another rental property or investing in another asset class, like stocks.

    2. Long-term wealth through appreciation.

    Appreciation simply refers to the gradual increase in a property’s value over time. 

    While cash flow can provide for my immediate expenses, appreciation is all about the long-term benefits.

    Like investing in stocks over the long run, real estate tends to go up in value. The key is to hold a property long enough to benefit from that appreciation.

    To benefit from appreciation, all I really need to do is make my monthly mortgage payments, keep my property in decent condition, and let the market do the rest.

    Now that we’ve reviewed how cash flow and appreciation work together to generate long-term wealth, we can look at the additional benefits of debt pay-down.

    With rental properties, other people pay off my debt.

    When I buy a rental property, I take out a mortgage and agree to pay the bank each month until that mortgage is paid off. At all times, I remain responsible for paying back that debt.

    However, I do not pay that debt back with my own money.

    Instead, I rent out the property to tenants. I do my best to provide my tenants with a nice place to live in exchange for monthly rent payments.

    I then use those rent payments to pay back the loan.

    Each time I make a mortgage payment, part of the payment goes to interest on the loan and part of the payment goes toward the principal. This concept is known as amortization.

    By the way, this is how real estate investors use Good Debt, also know as leverage, to generate wealth.

    You may be totally against debt of all kind. That’s OK. Debt certainly carries risk. I’m not here to convince you that debt is a good thing or a bad thing. I’m just showing you how it works.

    For more on the difference between good debt and bad debt, check out my post here.

    What is loan amortization?

    Amortization is the process of paying back a loan over time in predetermined installments. While your payment amount remains the same, the composition of that payment changes over time.

    In the early years of paying off a mortgage, the vast majority of your payment goes to the interest. With each additional payment, more of the money goes towards the principal.

    When you take out a mortgage, your lender will give you an amortization table that shows you exactly how much of your monthly payment goes towards interest and principal for the duration of the loan.

    For example, if you take out a 30-year mortgage, you’ll receive a chart that shows 360 payments (12 monthly payments for 30 years). You can then look at any month in that 30-year period to see how much of your payment goes to interest vs. principal in that month.

    We hung that art piece by Tekuma artist Lulu Zheng, and I particularly loved how Lulu combines architecture and organic forms. Even if it is in the background, her 3D elephant brings the focus of the viewer towards her work, representing how renters can make a home feel like their own while they pay off my real estate debt.
    Photo by Naomi Hébert on Unsplash

    If you’re so inclined, you can also use an online calculator, like this one at calculator.net, to create an amortization chart for any loan you have.

    I’ll admit, looking at the amortization chart is the least fun part of any real estate closing.

    Seeing debt payments as far out as 30 years is a bit scary. It’s hard not to think of all the things that can go wrong during such a long time period. That’s why I prefer to think of amortization in general terms instead of specifics.

    Generally speaking, I know that some of my monthly payment goes to interest and some goes to principal. The longer I pay back the loan, the more of my payment goes to principal. That’s good enough for me.

    With a fixed-rate loan, your monthly payment remains the same.

    When you have a fixed-rate mortgage, your payment remains the same for the duration of the loan.

    At the same time, because of inflation, rents tend to go up over the long run. Rents may also go up if market conditions improve or if you have forced appreciation through enhancements to your property.

    When your rental income goes up, and your debt obligation remains constant, that means more cash flow for you.

    For example, say your monthly mortgage payment is $2,500 each month for the next 30 years. And, let’s say you currently earn $3,000 in monthly rent payments.

    Over time, your rental income should gradually increase. Some years in the future, you may be earning $4,000 or $5,000 per month in rental income. All the while, your monthly mortgage payment remains $2,500.

    You can use that extra income, after covering all other expenses, to pay for your immediate life expenses, pay off your loan faster, or invest in other assets.

    It’s for these reasons that having a fixed debt payment over a long time horizon is one of the biggest advantages to investing in real estate.

    Think of it this way. Just like with your personal Budget After Thinking, you can make significant strides towards financial freedom when your income increases and your expenses remain fixed.

    What do you think of investing in real estate so other people can pay off your debt?

    Now, you know three of my main reasons for investing in real estate: cash flow, appreciation, and debt pay-down.

    Regarding debt pay-down, each month my tenants pay rent, I can use that income to shrink my loan balance.

    As my loan balance shrinks, my equity in the property increases. Equity is just another way of saying ownership interest.

    When my equity in a property increases, my net worth increases.

    So, on top of monthly cash flow and appreciation, debt pay-down is another way to generate wealth through real estate over the long run.

    That’s three ways to make money off of a single investment.

    Not bad, huh?

    If you’re a real estate investor, let us know how you’ve used debt to increase your net worth.

  • Money Question: What Would I do with $10 Million?

    Money Question: What Would I do with $10 Million?

    In a recent post, I asked: If you woke up tomorrow with $10 million in your bank account, would you do anything differently?

    I ask a version of this question whenever I teach my personal finance course to law students.

    Asking what you would do with $10 million is just another way to ask what you would do with financial freedom.

    Attaching a specific dollar amount to the question helps make financial freedom seem real. It turns the aspirational concept of financial freedom into actual numbers.

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    In a recent post, I asked: If you woke up tomorrow with $10 million in your bank account, would you do anything differently? I ask a version of this question whenever I teach my personal finance course to law students. Attaching a specific dollar amount to the question helps make financial freedom seem real. Many thanks to one of our blog followers, Ian, for turning the question around and asking me what I would do with $10 million! #thinkandtalkmoney

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    Many thanks to one of our blog followers, Ian, for turning the question around and asking me what I would do with $10 million!

    It’s been some time since I put some real thought into this question. I’m happy to have gone through the thought process in crafting this post.

    If you haven’t already, I encourage you to do the same and think about exactly what you would do if you woke up with $10 million.

    Before I share my answer, I want to highlight some other reader responses to the question, which should shed some light on my decisions.

    Let’s get to it.

    🚨If you know anybody who would benefit from thinking and talking about money even just a little bit, please share the Think and Talk Money blog with them! I post 3 times every week. 🚨

    Disappearing on a beach.

    The most common response to what people would do with $10 million involved some version of:

    Invest the money and then disappear on a faraway beach.

    In a way, the “disappear on a beach” response illustrates what many of us are striving for with financial independence. By that, I mean the goal of having enough money to then not have to work if we don’t want to.

    palm tree near sea shore illustrating that life on a beach may get lonely after a while, which is why I would not disappear with $10 million.
    Photo by Maarten van den Heuvel on Unsplash

    Personally, I share the goal of becoming financially free, but I’m not looking to retire early and disappear. After all, I believe in FIPE not FIRE.

    I think jetting off to the beach would be nice at first but then get old pretty fast. That said, I can certainly appreciate the desire to take some time away from life’s daily stressors.

    Invest and then buy a shotgun.

    One reader, Sean, shared a pretty sensible plan:

    Put $9 million in the S&P 500, pay off debt with the rest and buy a nice shot gun.

    It’s hard to argue with this plan. Of course, it’s never a bad idea to pay off debt or invest in the S&P 500.

    I think it’s also important to treat yourself, within reason. I’m not in favor of earning financial freedom if it means being afraid to spend money on the things that make you happy.

    While I don’t know the first thing about shotguns, I’m guessing they represent a hobby of Sean’s. I’m certainly in favor of spending on hobbies, experiences, and activities that bring you joy.

    Well done, Sean.

    The struggle between “should” and “want.”

    Finally, Zach shared a sentiment that many of us struggle with when it comes to money decisions:

    I know what the answer should be but I’d really like to buy a house and a couple of the cool cars I’d always ogled over growing up.

    Zach’s comment stood out to me in the way he phrased it. He knows what he should do, which in his mind is different from what he wants to do.

    Zach’s one sentence comment sums up a money struggle that many of us have.

    We know what we should do, but we’re constantly fighting what we want to do.

    I would challenge Zach, and anyone else feeling this way, to take some time thinking about what you truly want out of life. I did this when I wrote down my Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom while on a beach in Florida.

    If you put some real thought into it, you might find that material possessions are actually not that important to you. Rather, buying your freedom is so much more valuable.

    I would want to know more about Zach’s desire to buy a couple of cool cars. Maybe, like our previous reader wanting a shotgun, having cool cars is a hobby for him that brings much joy.

    However, I have my doubts that’s what Zach meant. The way he phrased it (“cars I’d always ogled over growing up”) leads me to believe he wants these cars to show off.

    Here’s the problem with that type of spending.

    Buying a couple of cool cars would likely only give you a short-lived burst of happiness. Sure, it would be fun to drive them around at first. Maybe it’d also be fun to have your friends over and show off what you just bought.

    But, studies routinely show that the burst of happiness from material possessions like cars only lasts for so long.

    When that initial burst fades away, you’re stuck with the hassle of owning multiple cars that you probably wouldn’t even drive much. Your friends would stop caring before too long.

    Add in the cost of insurance, maintenance, and garage space, and these cool cars will be a major drag on your financial freedom.

    By the way, there’s nothing at all wrong with buying a house. You need to live somewhere. Just keep it reasonable.

    Otherwise, you’ll end up working long hours for a lot of years just to keep the house. That might not be a trade off you want to make.

    What I would do with $10 million.

    Without further ado, here’s exactly what I would do if I woke up with $10 million tomorrow.

    1. $50,000 to go on an African safari with my wife.

    My wife and I have three kids at home ages five and under. With a newborn, even date night can feel like an epic adventure. My wife does so much for all of us, that this is the easiest decision I’ve ever made.

    With the first $50,000, she and I are packing our bags for Africa and leaving the kids with Grandma. Since this would be our first big trip in six years, we’re balling out without worrying about the cost.

    I am a big advocate of using money as a tool to build memories. How could I do better than taking a dream vacation with my wife?

    2. Pay off my house.

    My goal is to be financially free. A big part of that is not having any debt. That’s why the next chunk of the $10 million is going to pay off my house.

    I could certainly make more money long-term by investing in the stock market or purchasing more rental properties. But, with $10 million at my disposal, I don’t need any more money. I know when enough is enough.

    I love my house and my community and would rather know that I can stay here with my family for the long run.

    3. Pay off my rental ski condo.

    In 2021, my wife and I bought a ski condo in Colorado. We currently rent it out for most of the year.

    If I had $10 million, I would pay off the mortgage on the ski condo, stop renting it out, and spend a lot more time out west with my family.

    Hiker on a log illustrating what I would do with $10 million, like hiking with my family.
    Photo by Jon Flobrant on Unsplash

    As I mentioned, one of my main goals in life is to create as many experiences and memories as possible with my family.

    Paying off my condo would allow all of us to spend more time together doing the things we love, like skiing, hiking, biking, and swimming.

    Best of all, we could do these things while sharing our condo with our extended family members.

    4. $250,000 in a high yield savings account.

    Everyone should have an emergency savings account. I would put $250,000 into a high yield savings account and turn to this money as my first line of defense in case of emergencies.

    After eliminating my mortgage debt on my primary home and my ski condo, $250,000 would be enough to fund my life for about 2 years. That’s a lot of runway and provides peace of mind.

    5. $300,000 total in my kids’ 529 college savings accounts.

    Besides eliminating debt, my other major financial goal right now is to save enough to pay for my three kids’ college. To cross this goal off my list once and for all, I would put a combined $300,000 into their 529 accounts.

    I landed on $300,000 by playing around with an online calculator, like this one. $300,000 should be enough to reach my goal for each kid.

    6. 70% of the rest in a total stock market index fund.

    I am an index fund investor, through and through. I have no interest in trying to beat the market or time the market.

    I’m perfectly happy with earning around 10% per year, which is the historical annual average return of the S&P 500.

    So, I would put 70% of the rest of my money in a total stock market index fund. I prefer Vanguard’s popular offering, VTSAX.

    If you’re wondering why I’m not putting all my money in “safer” asset categories, like cash or bonds, it’s because I still have a long investment horizon in front of me.

    I plan on investing for decades to come. I’m OK riding out the market swings that come with investing in stocks. I also want to keep up with inflation so my purchasing power remains strong in the future.

    7. 30% in a total bond market index fund.

    While I would mostly be invested in stocks, I would be highly motivated to preserve more of my wealth. Like I mentioned before, enough is enough.

    Investing in bonds is a good way to de-risk your portfolio, even if it means earning less each year.

    For that reason, I would allocate the remaining 30% of my money to a total bond market index fund. I would choose Vanguard’s VBTLX.

    I would not pay off my rental properties or quit my job.

    You may have noticed I did not mention paying off my rental properties or quitting my job.

    My rental properties are all on very low-rate mortgages and generate strong monthly cash flow. These properties are performing beautifully as is.

    I don’t see any good reason to mess with a good thing. I could always re-visit if circumstances changed.

    With $10 million, why am I not quitting my job and jetting off to a beach?

    The truth is I really like my life right now. I don’t see any good reason to make sudden, major life changes.

    I like the people I work with and the work that we do for our mesothelioma clients.

    On top of that, I like where I live and am not really craving any major purchases. I would probably get some new furniture for the house. Maybe I’d plant another tree or two in the backyard.

    Plus, because I’m still earning an income in this scenario, I can continue to use my income to fund my life. That’s why I didn’t account for daily spending in my plan for $10 million.

    In fact, I’d have more income available because the $10 million is more than enough for my long-term savings and investment goals.

    I could use the money I had been saving for these goals for more present day spending. I’m not sure I would, but I could spend more freely, if I wanted to.

    So, there you have it. That’s exactly what I would do with $10 million right now.

    What do you think of my plan?

    Would you do anything differently?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Real Estate has Accelerated my Journey to Financial Freedom

    Real Estate has Accelerated my Journey to Financial Freedom

    I invest in real estate for one reason and one reason only:

    To accelerate my journey to financial freedom.

    Through monthly cash flow, debt pay-down, appreciation, and tax benefits, I’m convinced that owning rental properties is the fastest way to reach financial freedom.

    We’ll soon discuss each of these advantages in more detail. For now, here’s a quick overview:

    • Cash Flow: After paying all the bills each month, whatever is left is considered cash flow. You can use this cash flow however you want.
    • Appreciation: Real estate tends to increase in value over the long-term. If you hold real estate long enough, you should benefit from appreciation. This also means that your net worth grows.
    • Debt Pay-down: If you have a mortgage on a rental property, your tenants are the ones paying down that mortgage each month. That means your net worth grows because your debt is shrinking.
    • Tax Benefits: The tax code favors real estate investors. Whereas W-2 income is heavily taxed, many real estate investors pay little in taxes (and sometimes nothing in taxes). Some of the biggest reasons for this are depreciation and lower tax rates for capital gains.

    With these four major advantages in mind, you can hopefully start to see how investing in real estate will accelerate your journey to financial independence.

    Additionally, you may have noticed that investing in real estate provides both immediate and long-term financial benefits. 

    Let’s focus on that point for a moment.

    Investing in real estate offers immediate and long-term financial benefits.

    To be truly financially free, you need to cover immediate life expenses and prepare for future life expenses.

    In terms of your Budget After Thinking, your Now Money and Life Money are considered immediate life expenses. Your Later Money is for future expenses.

    Rental properties can help you in each budget category. The monthly cash flow and tax benefits will cover your Now Money and Life Money needs. Debt pay-down and appreciation offer significant upside for your Later Money.

    I’ve been hard-pressed to find any other asset class that provides as many benefits for both for the here-and-now and the future.

    There’s another major reason I believe in the power of investing in real estate.

    It has to do with one of my ultimate life goals: to create more time to spend with my family. This is one of my major life goals, in part, because of what I’ve learned in my career as an attorney.

    What I’ve learned about time and family as an attorney.

    I graduated law school at age 24 and spent the first couple of years of my career clerking for an appellate court judge.

    To this day, I tell my students that clerking for a judge is the best job for recent graduates. I recommend that all my students apply for judicial clerkships.

    When my clerkship ended, I joined my current law firm where I continue to represent people with mesothelioma, a rare and terminal cancer caused by asbestos.

    If it wasn’t for what I’ve learned from my mesothelioma clients, I would have never started investing in real estate.

    Let me explain what I mean.

    I’ve learned invaluable life lessons from my clients with mesothelioma.

    Most of my clients are in their 70s and 80s. That’s because mesothelioma is a disease that takes decades to manifest. A person can be exposed to asbestos in his 30s and not get sick until his 70s.

    A significant part of my job has been meeting with my clients in their homes after they have just found out they have incurable cancer. Before we ever get around to talking about the case, we inevitably end up talking about life.

    During these conversations, I do most of the listening. You can imagine what I’ve learned about life in these moments. It is not a stretch to say that many of my core beliefs have been shaped by these powerful experiences.

    When I listen to my clients talk about life, certain themes continue to surface.

    One major theme I hear from my clients is the importance of family. They’ve taught me the importance of creating experiences and memories with loved ones, usually involving family vacations or time spent with friends.

    Summer in Paphos representing creating more experiences with family.
    Photo by Natalya Zaritskaya on Unsplash

    Like my clients, I want to create as much time as possible with my family and friends. When I look back on my life, I want to look back on all the experiences and memories I’ve created.

    With rental properties, I can earn money without being physically present. And while investing in real estate is not completely passive, it provides tremendous upside without requiring all of my time.

    That means I can spend more time with my wife and three kids while still making money.

    Because of what I’ve learned from my clients, there’s nothing more important to me.

    I started investing in real estate in my mid-30s.

    By the time I reached my mid-30s, I had paid off my student loan debt. I had successfully saved up for an engagement ring and a wedding. Newly married, my focus shifted to saving up for a downpayment on a home.

    At the time I started saving up for a home, I had no idea that I could use my savings to invest in real estate.

    It wasn’t until I went to a Cubs game with a good friend of mine, The Professor, that I learned about real estate investing. This is when my journey to financial freedom really accelerated.

    See, The Professor had a beautiful condo with an incredible rooftop deck near Wrigley Field. During the game, he told me he was selling the condo and moving into a 4-flat with his fiancee in an up-and-coming part of town.

    Huh?

    Why on earth would you give up your amazing condo? And move to a random neighborhood I’d maybe been to one time in my life?

    I thought The Professor had lost his mind. Back then, I had no idea what a 4-flat even was. I couldn’t even point to his new neighborhood on a map of Chicago.

    The Professor set me straight.

    door key symbolizing how investing in real estate can accelerate your journey to financial freedom.
    Photo by Maria Ziegler on Unsplash

    He walked me through the numbers. He explained that he was going from paying $3,000 per month for his condo to receiving $700 per month on top of living for free in the 4-flat. That’s a $3,700 difference per month!

    I immediately thought about the experiences and memories that I could create with my wife if we had an extra $3,700 per month to spend.

    I already knew what my clients would say about the opportunity to create such memories.

    It almost sounded too good to be true.

    I did my homework and bought my first investment property less than a year later.

    During my talk with The Professor, he introduced me to BiggerPockets.

    If you haven’t heard of BiggerPockets, it is a treasure trove of online resources to help real estate investors of all levels.

    At BiggerPockets, you can listen to podcasts, read blog posts, and ask questions on the forums. You can also choose from a wide selection of incredible books on real estate investing.

    One of my favorite BiggerPockets books is Chad “Coach” Carson’s book, Small and Mighty Real Estate Investor: How to Reach Financial Freedom with Fewer Rental Properties.

    Coach Carson’s message is right there in the title: you can use real estate to efficiently reach financial freedom. He makes a compelling argument to use real estate to build a life, not the biggest bank account.

    Being introduced to BiggerPockets was a game changer for me. I believe in the motto, “Trust but verify.” With BiggerPockets, I could do my own research and decide for myself if real estate investing was for me.

    Over the next few weeks, I read everything I could about investing in real estate. When I wasn’t reading about real estate, I listened to podcasts.

    It didn’t take long before I was convinced that I wanted a 4-flat of my own.

    I am using real estate to accelerate my journey to financial freedom.

    To me, investing in real estate is all about fast-tracking my journey to financial freedom. It has not always been easy, but it’s definitely been worth it.

    I’m fortunate that my career has introduced me to so many wonderful people.

    I am convinced that I would not have been as motivated to act if it weren’t for my conversations with my mesothelioma clients. If nothing else, I know that talk with The Professor about real estate would not have resonated with me the same way.

    Fast forward to the present day, I now own 10 apartments in Chicago and a rental ski condo in Colorado.

    Coming up in the blog, I’ll share with you everything I’ve learned about investing in real estate along the way.

    As always, reach out if you have any questions or leave a comment below.

  • What if You Woke up Tomorrow with $10 Million?

    What if You Woke up Tomorrow with $10 Million?

    If you woke up tomorrow with $10 million in your bank account, would you do anything differently?

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    What would you do if you had $10 million in your bank account right now? #thinkandtalkmoney #financialfreedom #whatwouldyoudo

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    I ask a version of this question whenever I teach my personal finance course to law students. I’ve also asked this question to a lot of my friends and family members.

    Whether in class or with friends, this question is a great conversation starter. It’s not so much about the dollar amount as it is about the money mindset that goes along with that amount.

    That’s because asking what you would do with $10 million is just another way to ask what you would do with financial freedom.

    Attaching a specific dollar amount to the question helps make financial freedom seem real. That’s because it turns the aspirational concept of financial freedom into actual numbers.

    With those numbers in mind, you can more realistically think about what your life could look like if you were financially free.

    That’s why I love the question. I find it very interesting to talk to people about what they would do with financial freedom.

    Why I love talking about financial freedom.

    If you hear $10 million in the bank and think of spending it on mansions, boats, and cars… this is not the blog for you.

    I want to talk about using that $10 million to buy something way more valuable than material possessions: your freedom.

    When you are financially free, you can choose to do work that is meaningful to you without worrying about how much it pays. You can also choose to spend more time with people who are meaningful to you.

    I am striving for both of those things on my journey to financial freedom.

    By the way, $10 million is just an arbitrary number. Maybe your number is $3 million or $8 million or $15 million. For this conversation, use whatever number represents financial freedom to you.

    The amount may differ based on your age, spending habits, debt level, dependents, etc.

    The idea is to pick a dollar amount that is high enough that you wouldn’t have to work anymore unless you wanted to. In its simplest form, that’s what financial freedom means.

    I’ve found that when I have this conversation, $10 million is a good, round number to get people thinking about what they would do with financial freedom.

    So, today we’re going to ask ourselves if we would do anything differently if we woke up with $10 million in the bank.

    To help get the wheels turning, let’s start with some simple math to see what having $10 million in the bank really means.

    What does $10 million in the bank really mean?

    Let’s do some simple math using the 4% Rule to help frame the question.

    The 4% Rule suggests that you can safely withdraw 4% of your investments each year and expect your money to last for 30 years. 

    Without getting too technical, the 4% Rule is based off of research looking at historical investment gains, inflation, and other variables. I view the 4% Rule as a useful tool to ballpark your magic retirement number.

    The 4% Rule is a great place for us to start thinking about what you could do with $10 million.

    Here’s what the formula looks like using $10 million as our current savings:

    Current Savings x 4% (.04) = Annual Retirement Spending

    $10,000,000 x .04 =$400,000.00

    This means that according to the 4% Rule, you could spend $400,000 annually and expect your money to last 30 years.

    This is a useful calculation that puts into perspective how much money $10 million really is. You can essentially view having $10 million in the bank as the same as having a job that pays you $400,000 per year.

    The major difference is you don’t have to get out of bed in the morning to receive this $400,000.

    Note for simplicity’s sake, we’ll set aside the tax implications of investment income v. W-2 income for this hypothetical.

    One other note: if you had $10 million in the bank, you don’t have to spend $400,000 per year. Rather, the 4% Rule suggests you could spend up to that amount and not run out of money for 30 years. If you spend less than 4% each year, your $10 million will last longer.

    How much can you spend each month with $10 million in the bank?

    To help you picture your life with $10 million in the bank, we can break down that $400,000 annual spending amount even more.

    I like to know how much I could safely spend on a monthly basis if I had $10 million in the bank. Knowing the amount I could spend monthly helps make the $10 million more digestible.

    That requires just a bit more very simple math:

    $400,000 annually / 12 months = $33,333.33

    So, if you have $10 million in the bank, you should be able to safely spend about $33,000 per month.

    The way to the cabin lady with arm out her window symbolizing what you can do with $10 million in the bank.
    Photo by averie woodard on Unsplash

    Now, you can view that number in the context of your Budget After Thinking. You might learn that you’re spending way less than $33,000 per month. Or, you may be spending way more.

    Either way, it puts that $10 million into smaller, more digestible numbers.

    To recap, we now know that $10 million in the bank means we can spend roughly $33,000 per month and not run out of money for 30 years. The important question then becomes:

    Would you make any changes to your current life if you started each month with $33,000 in the bank without having to work?

    Let’s explore what your answer may say about your current work situation.

    Would you still work your current job if you had $10 million in the bank?

    If you had $10 million in the bank, would you continue to work your current job?

    If your answer is “Yes,” that’s a great sign that you enjoy your work and the people you work with. You also most likely have motivations for working that go beyond earning money. That’s a really nice position to be in.

    By the way, I know a good amount of people in this boat. Even with $10 million, they wouldn’t change a thing about their work situation.

    If your answer is “No,” it’s worth thinking about why you wouldn’t keep working your job. Is it the people? The hours? The lack of stimulation? Overall stress?

    $10 million in the bank should be enough to leave your job for new pursuits. You can start to ask yourself what you would do for work if you didn’t have to work for money.

    I also know a lot of people in this boat. If they had $10 million, they would be out the door tomorrow.

    Why am I talking about new pursuits instead of shutting it down completely?

    With $10 million in the bank, your initial thought might be to just shut it down completely. For people of a certain age or people with health considerations, that certainly could be the right choice.

    Setting those reasons aside, I do not believe in retiring early. I’m convinced that humans are meant to be productive. We are social creatures who at our core want to be contributing.

    I think this especially holds true for high achievers who have put in the work and made sacrifices to become financially free in the first place.

    That’s why I don’t believe financial independence has to mean retiring. It’s also why I don’t like the popular acronym, FIRE: Financial Independence, Retire Early.

    The problem for me is that the FIRE end game is suggested right there in the name: become financially independent so you can retire.

    I don’t like what the word “retire” implies.

    If you look it up, you’ll see that the word “retire“means to withdraw, to retreat, to recede.

    None of those things sound appealing to me at all. 

    Each word implies moving backwards. I’m not working so hard to achieve financial freedom so I can move backwards in life.

    Instead, I like to view my financial freedom journey as FIPE:

    Financial Independence, Pivot Early.

    I believe in FIPE not FIRE.

    When you have financial independence, you have options. You can make decisions based on your core values instead of making decisions based on money. You can pivot, if you want.

    One of the ways you can pivot is by taking more control of what you do with your working hours. It’s not about quitting work entirely and wasting away on a beach. As nice as that might sound right now, it will get old fast.

    That’s why I believe in FIPE not FIRE.

    I encourage you to think about how you might use $10 million to pivot instead of to retire. Could you use that money to buy yourself the freedom to pursue more meaningful work?

    So, what would you do with $10 million in the bank?

    The point in asking about $10 million is to help you think about your current choices and whether it’s time to make some adjustments.

    Having this conversation with your friends and family will teach you a lot about your current situation. Remember, talking about money is not taboo.

    In these conversations, pay attention to what you learn about yourself and how you presently spend your time.

    Even though $10 million may seem like a distant dream, you don’t need to have that much money to start your own financial freedom journey.

    You can start making choices today to put yourself in a better position to pivot, if you so choose.

    Maybe you wouldn’t change a single thing about your career choices. Or, maybe you would be out your employer’s door tomorrow.

    In the end, thinking about what you could do with $10 million in the bank will help you lead a more intentional life.

    So, let us know in the comments below.

    What would you do with $10 million in the bank?

  • How to Prioritize Investment Account Types While in Debt

    How to Prioritize Investment Account Types While in Debt

    Recently, we’ve been talking about some tricky money questions related to investing.

    We first looked at whether it makes sense to invest while you’re in debt.

    We then looked at whether to prioritize investing for retirement or for your kid’s college.

    These are questions that commonly come up when I’m teaching law students and young lawyers. Of course, these questions are best answered when we consider both the emotions and the math of money.

    Today, we’ll look at a third question that comes up regularly:

    How should you prioritize certain investment account types, especially if you’re still paying off debt?

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    Airport walks ✈️💭 401k? Roth IRA? Savings? Debt? Don’t know how to prioritize where to put your money first? I break it down here: https://thinkandtalkmoney.com/how-to-prioritize-investment-account-types-while-in-debt/ #thinkandtalkmoney #401k #rothira #savings #debt #financialfreedom

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    This is another great question.

    If you’re wondering what I mean by different investment account types, you can read about my four favorite account types here.

    Below are my thoughts on how I would choose between different investment account types while paying off debt.

    Let me know if you agree or would prioritize a different order in the comments below.

    1. Invest just enough to qualify for your employer match.

    Your first goal should be to invest enough in your 401(k) plan to qualify for the employer match.

    Many employers today offer a match to incentive employees to contribute to their 401(k) plans. To qualify for the match, you must be participating in your company’s plan and make contributions yourself.

    The match is usually a percentage of your overall salary, usually between 3% and 6%. 

    For example, let’s say your salary is $100,000 and your employer offers to match your contributions up to 5% of your salary.

    That means if you contribute $5,000 (5% of your salary), your employer will contribute an additional $5,000 (5% match) to your account.

    In other words, your $5,000 automatically turns into $10,000.

    Think about that for a moment.

    That’s a guaranteed 100% return on your contribution. You put in $5,000 and you automatically get another $5,000. You won’t find a guaranteed return like that anywhere else.

    That’s why if your company offers a match, it’s a no-brainer to take advantage of that match.

    For this reason, an employer match is often described as “free money.”

    I don’t like the term “free money” because it implies that you have not earned that money as an employee for your company. I prefer to refer to the company match as a bonus you’ve rightfully earned. 

    The key is to accept that earned bonus by ensuring you are meeting the minimum requirements to qualify.

    Whether you think of it as free money or as a bonus you’ve earned, make sure you contribute enough to your 401(k) plan to qualify for the employer match.

    2. Pay off all credit card debt.

    After you hit the employer match, and before you think about further investments, you should pay off all credit card debt.

    Note that credit card debt is in a category of its own because of the extremely high interest rates that accompany credit cards.

    Currently, the average credit card interest rate is 20.12%.

    The S&P 500 has historically averaged a 10% annual return.

    That gap is so large that it’s a good idea to pay off your credit card debt before turning to further investments.

    Think about it like this: with credit card debt, you are guaranteed to pay a penalty of around 20% until you pay off that debt. When investing, you can reasonably hope to earn around 10% interest.

    Because the penalty you’re paying is twice the rate you’re hoping to earn, the smart move is to eliminate that penalty.

    For help on paying off your credit card debt, check out my top 10 tips here.

    Why not pay off your credit card debt entirely before investing in your 401(k)?

    You may be wondering why I recommend qualifying for your employer match before paying off credit card.

    Even with such high credit card interest rates, there’s a good reason to prioritize qualifying for your employer match. We touched on that reason above.

    Let’s revisit our example. With an employer match, if you contribute $5,000, your employer will also contribute $5,000.

    As we said, that’s like earning a 100% guaranteed return on your money. A 100% guaranteed return is too good to pass up.

    No other reasonable investment option offers a 100% guaranteed rate of return. You can’t even reasonably hope to match the 20% penalty that credit card companies charge.

    That’s why eliminating your credit card debt should be your next priority after receiving your employer match.

    3. Allocate 75% of available funds to other loans and 25% to investments.

    Once you have paid off your credit card debt, I recommend putting 75% of your available funds to loans and 25% to other investments.

    When I say loans, I am referring to student loans, personal loans, lines of credit, and HELOCs. Note, I am not referring to primary mortgage debt.

    It’s not uncommon for law students to have hundreds of thousands of dollars in debt. The same is true for students in medical school and business school.

    It’s not just people with student loan debt who face this question. As one example, perhaps you’ve used a HELOC to buy investment property, like I have.

    There’s a reason credit card debt is in a separate category from other loans, like student loans and HELOCs.

    Unlike credit card debt, student loan debt and HELOC debt typically come with lower interest rates.

    The current lowest federal student loan interest rate is 6.53%.

    The current average HELOC interest rate is 8.27%.

    Your loans may have even lower interest rates. Regardless, the odds are that your interest rate is below the historical 10% average annual return of the S&P 500.

    While it’s never a bad idea to eliminate debt, there are some good reasons why you should invest even though you’re in debt.

    We explored these reasons and why I recommend a 75/25 ratio in my recent post on investing while in debt:

    A Tricky Money Question: Should You Invest While in Debt?

    If you’re on board with investing while paying off debt, the question becomes: where should you invest that money?

    That brings us to my next suggestion.

    4. Max out your 401(k) plan.

    Once you reach this step, you should have no credit card debt. You should also be applying either the 75/25 ratio to invest while you’re in debt, or have no other debt to pay off.

    At this point, I suggest maxing out your 401(k) with your remaining available funds.

    The reason I suggest maxing out your 401(k) is because these contributions are made with pre-tax dollars. In other words, you get a tax break today by investing in your 401(k).

    To put it another way, you will save money on taxes every year you contribute to your 401(k) plan.

    Don’t sleep on the impact of taxes on our money decisions. Over the long term, taxes can be hard to predict, but they should not be ignored.

    changed priorities ahead illustrating the options you have as an investor with different account types.
    Photo by Ch_pski on Unsplash

    Nobody really knows what taxes are going to be like in the future. Yes, it’s a safe assumption that taxes will keep going up.

    But, taxes have always been complicated. I’m guessing they will always be complicated. Even if taxes generally go up, there’s no telling the exact impact taxes will have on your personal situation.

    That’s why I prefer to take the guaranteed tax savings now. I’m ok with the possibility of paying more in taxes decades from now. That’s especially true because I have plenty of good uses for those tax savings right now.

    That’s why I recommend maxing out your 401(k) before moving on to my final suggestion.

    5. Max out your HSA, Roth IRA and 529 plan.

    Once you reach this step, you’re in great shape. Reaching this point means you have maxed out your 401(k) plan, which means you’re receiving an employer match.

    It means you have no credit card debt. On top of that, you are paying down your other loans with a 75/25 ratio or have eliminated those loans entirely.

    Now, you have options. You’ve earned the right to choose the best investment account type for your situation.

    Besides a 401(k), my other favorite account types are a Roth IRA, a Health Savings Account (HSA), and a 529 account.

    You can read all about my favorite investment account types in this recent post:

    My 4 Favorite Investment Accounts for Long-term Wealth

    Depending on your income, a Roth IRA may be the best account type for additional retirement savings.

    If you’re healthy and can cover certain medical expenses, maybe you would benefit from an HSA.

    Have kids and worried about paying for college? Maybe a 529 plan is right for you.

    The point is you’ve earned the right to pick the best investment accounts for your present situation.

    You really can’t go wrong with any of these choices.

    What do you think of this plan to prioritize certain investment accounts while in debt?

    What do you think about this plan to prioritize certain investment account types, especially if you’re still paying off debt?

    Let us know in the comments below.

    If you’ve already made it to step 5 and are looking for help with what to do next, the truth is that you have too many options to cover in this post.

    To help you start thinking about your choices, you could:

    • Invest in a traditional brokerage account;
    • Invest in real estate; or
    • Pay down your primary mortgage.

    If you’ve already made it to step 5, reach out and I’d be happy to help you think and talk about your options.

    The best way to reach me is to sign up for my weekly email and reply to any email.

  • Best Money Mindset Book? My 9 Favorite Picks

    Best Money Mindset Book? My 9 Favorite Picks

    On my journey to financial independence, I’ve read close to 100 personal finance books.

    My favorite books motivate me to think about the relationship between life and money. I think of this type of book as a “money mindset book.”

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    What is your favorite money mindset book? If you need a summer read, I rank my top eight here: https://thinkandtalkmoney.com/best-money-mindset-book-my-8-favorite-picks/ #thinkandtalkmoney#moneymindset #summerreads #personalfinance

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    In today’s post, I’ll show you my nine favorite money mindset books. These books share a common theme: they will inspire you to use money to build a life that you’re proud of.

    One of the ways these books do that is by exploring the emotional side of money. In other words, they don’t just talk about the numbers and math of personal finance.

    That not only makes the books more interesting to read, it also makes them so much more practical in the real world.

    See, I am striving to build the best life possible for my family. To do that, I need to learn more than just the numbers.

    That means I need to be good at not only making money, but also using that money to build a life on my terms. That requires finding a balance, which can be tricky.

    To help strike that balance, I’ve studied how others have done it. Then, I can take what I learn and implement those lessons into my own life.

    As a personal finance teacher, I can also share these lessons with my students.

    And, that brings us to my favorite money mindset books.

    Each one of these books has helped me develop my core life philosophies. Importantly, these books have helped me acquire and use money in alignment with those core beliefs.

    Of course, when I review my Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom, I can feel the influence of each of these books on my most important values.

    I recommend that you check out each of these money mindset books. You will learn not just how to acquire money, but also how to use that money to live your best life.

    Let’s take a look at my favorites, in no particular order.

    1. Rich Dad Poor Dad by Robert Kiyosaki

    There’s a reason Rich Dad Poor Dad is the best selling personal finance book of all time. Its message is so powerful and simple that I’ve been recommending this money mindset book for years.

    If you read Rich Dad Poor Dad, your entire money mindset will be changed. Kiyosaki brilliantly shares the stories he learned about money while growing up in Hawaii.

    His Rich Dad was really his best friend’s dad, who was a very successful real estate investor and business owner. His Poor Dad was his actual dad, a highly educated and hardworking man who followed a traditional career path.

    Using these two role models in his life, he makes a very compelling case that most of us go about life and money all wrong.

    This is the money mindset book you want to start with.

    Read Rich Dad Poor Dad. It’s the money mindset book that will light a fire under you like no other book I’ve read.

    2. The Psychology of Money by Morgan Housel

    In The Psychology of Money, Housel writes about how people make decisions with their money in the real world. Housel agrees with one of our main themes at Think and Talk Money:

    Money is emotional.

    We can all be shown data and spreadsheets and understand what we should do. But, that’s usually not enough to change our behavior.

    Housel is here to help with that. In The Psychology of Money, he takes core personal finance lessons and translates those lessons into regular life concepts.

    Additionally, Housel teaches us the different ways people think about money. Then, he offers his perspective on how we can make better sense of money through our own life experiences.

    Read The Psychology of Money. This money mindset book will help you understand the relationship between money and happiness.

    3. Think and Grow Rich by Napoleon Hill

    Think and Grow Rich is another classic money mindset book that will shift your entire viewpoint on earning a living.

    I first read this money mindset book in college when I learned my friend’s dad offered him $50 if he read this book.

    $50 to read a book?

    I needed to see what this book was all about.

    At the time, I didn’t appreciate how much this money mindset book would change my life.

    Originally published in 1937 and later updated, Think and Grow Rich, will convince you that you can be successful.

    Initially, Hill studied innovators like Henry Ford and Thomas Edison. In the updated version, you’ll learn about modern figures like Bill Gates and Mary Kay Ash.

    Books on a brown wooden shelf, which includes a money mindset book to help learn about the balance between life and money.
    Photo by Susan Q Yin on Unsplash

    Hill’s book is so good because of what he reveals about these legendary figures.

    The secret?

    There was nothing mystical about any of them. Before they became legends, they were just like you and me.

    You can be successful in any walk of life if you just stop sleepwalking through life like everyone else and do something.

    Read Think and Grow Rich. This money mindset book will motivate you to do that thing you’ve been saying you would do, but haven’t yet.

    4. The Richest Man in Babylon by George S. Clason

    The Richest Man in Babylon is a third classic money mindset book originally published nearly 100 years ago.

    This book is a quick read. It’s ideal for anyone still not convinced that they have to pay attention to their personal finances.

    Clason wrote a simple collection of fables set in the ancient city of Babylon. Each fable illustrates the importance of a key money habit, like saving and investing.

    Through his stories, you’ll see how you can get ahead in life by practicing strong financial habits.

    It’s not enough to just be good at making money. You need to be good at keeping that money, too.

    Read The Richest Man in Babylon. This money mindset book will introduce you to the building blocks of a healthy financial life.

    5. Your Money or Your Life by Vicki Robin and Joe Dominguez

    Your Money or Your Life is the complete package when it comes to money mindset books.

    Vicki Robin and Joe Dominguez are often credited for laying the groundwork for the Financial Independence Retire Early (FIRE) movement.

    While I prefer the term Financial Independence Pivot Early (FIPE), I share their viewpoints on the relationship between money, work, and time.

    Spoiler alert: when it comes to life and money, most of us are doing it all wrong. We chase money at the cost of our precious time.

    First, you’ll learn to think of money as nothing more than a tool to build your ideal life. Next, you’ll learn how to specifically use that tool to achieve financial independence.

    Read Your Money or Your Life. This money mindset book will motivate you to start valuing your time for what it’s really worth.

    6. The Millionaire Next Door by Thomas Stanley and William Danko

    It can be difficult to ignore the temptation to keep up with our neighbors. Whether we like it or not, we are concerned with our social status. Part of our self-worth gets tied to comparing ourselves to others.

    One of my favorite money mindset books, The Millionaire Next Door, discusses this concept in detail.

    To start, you need to adjust your perception of how real life millionaires behave.

    You may be surprised to learn how most millionaires have made their fortunes. Also, you may be surprised to learn about their modest lifestyles.

    Read The Millionaire Next Door. This money mindset book will help you if you’re struggling with comparing yourself to others.

    7. Die with Zero by Bill Perkins

    No money mindset book has led to more passionate conversations with my friends and family members than Die with Zero.

    First, Perkins encourages us to think about whether we are working too many hours. In Perkins’ view, the problem is that we are sacrificing the best years of our lives. Instead, we could be creating lifelong memories.

    In that same vein, Perkins makes a strong case that many of us are saving too much for retirement.

    Also, Perkins questions the conventional wisdom of waiting until we die to pass money onto our kids. Instead, he suggests helping our kids earlier in life when the money will be more meaningful.

    Read Die With Zero. This money mindset book will motivate you to book that vacation you’ve been putting off.

    8. Millionaire Milestones by Sam Dogen

    In Millionaire Milestones, Dogen covers his journey from finance bro in New York in his 20s to present day life as a writer, investor, and husband and father.

    What separates Millionaire Milestones from other personal finance books is that Dogen’s still on his journey.

    Girl reading a money mindset book to learn about the balance between life and money.
    Photo by Joel Muniz on Unsplash

    He’s not a newbie, and he’s not preaching from the rocking chair on his patio.

    Dogen’s presently raising kids. He’s focused on his website and his investments. Like you and me, he can relate to the present day challenges of personal finance because he’s still on his journey.

    You can read my full review of Millionaire Milestones in my separate post here.

    Read Millionaire Milestones. This money mindset book is the Goldilocks of personal finance books.

    9. The Simple Path to Wealth by JL Collins

    The Simple Path to Wealth by JL Collins is the best money mindset book on investing I’ve ever read.

    It is a must-read for anyone trying to figure out why and how to invest in the stock market.

    If you’re a new investor and don’t understand how to invest in the stock market, Collins will set you on your way.

    If you’re a seasoned investor unsure what to do in times of economic uncertainty, Collins is here to help. 

    Maybe you just need a bit of motivation or a reminder of how simple it is to build long-term wealth. There’s no one better than Collins to provide that pep talk.

    Collins is sometimes described as “the Godfather of Financial Independence” in the personal finance community. He has a popular blog where you can read more about his story.

    The short version is that he wrote a series of letters to his then teenage daughter about money, investing, and life. He wanted to impart the wisdom he had accumulated during his lifetime and help her avoid the mistakes he had made.

    Those letters eventually led to his blog, which then led to his bestselling book, The Simple Path to Wealth, first released in 2015.

    Since then, Collins has been a thought-leaders in the financial independence community. He has inspired thousands, if not millions, of people around the world to accumulate massive wealth by following a few simple rules. 

    What makes Collins so transformative is his ability to make seemingly complex topics (like investing) into easily digestible and actionable information.

    If you have any intention of becoming financially independent and haven’t read The Simple Path to Wealth, now is the time to do so.

    I’ve read his book cover-to-cover twice and constantly refer back to his lessons.

    Each time I read his book, I’m reminded how simple it is to reach financial independence if I can just follow a few simple tips.

    You can read my full review of The Simple Path to Wealth in my post here.

    Read The Simple Path to Wealth. It is quite simply the best money mindset book on investing I’ve ever read.

    What is your favorite money mindset book?

    So, these are the money mindset books that I recommend most often.

    Wherever you are on your personal finance journey, there is something for everyone in one of these books.

    If you have read some of these money mindset books in the past, I suggest you read them again. As our lives and priorities change, so does our relationship with money.

    You’ll get something new and different from reading these books again. Personally, I didn’t fully appreciate these money mindset books until I was years into my career and knew what it felt like to work for money.

    • Have you read these money mindset books?
    • What money mindset books am I missing?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • My 4 Favorite Investment Accounts for Long-term Wealth

    My 4 Favorite Investment Accounts for Long-term Wealth

    We recently talked about that to start investing, there are really only two main steps: 

    • Step 1: Open an account.
    • Step 2: Pick the investments for inside that account.

    Today, we’ll discuss my four favorite investment accounts. These accounts are all tax-advantaged and match my evolving priorities, like saving for retirement and paying for college.

    To help explain why you may want different investment accounts, I’ll show you how I went from a single account in my 20s to 14 investment accounts today.

    Even if you’re just starting out in your career or new to investing, it’s likely that you’ll eventually have multiple types of investment accounts.

    You’ll almost certainly have different goals and priorities as life moves on.

    Before you do anything else, you’ll need to decide what type of investment account matches your investment goals. As we’ll see, investing is about more than just saving for retirement.

    By understanding the type of accounts to use that match your evolving priorities, you’ll have a better chance of reaching your goals.

    Let’s begin by looking at how my investment accounts have changed from the time I started investing in my 20s to the present day.

    My investment accounts in my 20s.

    When I started working in my 20s, I had one investment account:

    1. My 401(k).

    In my 20s, I was just starting my career and was proud to be investing in a 401(k). Back then, tracking my net worth was pretty easy.

    Part of the reason I only had one investment account was because I didn’t really know there were other types of accounts.

    It wasn’t until I prioritized learning about personal finance that I realized what else was out there.

    Quick side note: during law school, I did have a traditional brokerage account with a financial advisor. But, I closed that account when I learned we had set $93,000 on fire.

    There were two other main reasons I only had one investment account back then.

    First, I had student loan debt to pay off. I didn’t exactly have the means to invest in other accounts.

    If you’re in a similar boat and have student loan debt, be sure to check out my post:

    10 Student Loan Tips for Lawyers and Professionals

    Second, in addition to student loan debt, I also had credit card debt.

    It was only after a year of working and seeing my credit card debt grow each month that I decided to do something about it. In a lot of ways, my experience with credit card debt is what led me to start Think and Talk Money.

    If you’re likewise dealing with credit card debt, check out my post:

    10 Credit Card Tips for Lawyers and Professionals

    As time went on, a few things happened that led me to opening more investment accounts.

    First, I educated myself and learned that there were other investment accounts I could take advantage of.

    Then, as my career progressed, I started making more money. Because I had paid off my student loan debt and credit card debt, I had money leftover to invest.

    Finally, I got married and had kids. That meant my investment goals evolved.

    To match my evolving goals, it was beneficial to open different types of investment accounts.

    My investment accounts at age 40.

    Fast forward about 15 years, and my family’s balance sheet looks a little bit different than it did in my 20s.

    Between my wife, our three kids, and me, we now have 14 investment accounts:

    1. My 401(k)
    2. Wife’s 457(b)
    3. Wife’s Roth IRA
    4. My Roth IRA
    5. Wife’s Traditional IRA
    6. Wife’s Pension
    7. Daughter’s UTMA
    8. Son’s UTMA
    9. Baby’s UTMA
    10. Daughter’s 529
    11. Son’s 529
    12. Baby’s 529
    13. HSA
    14. Traditional Brokerage Account
    Just like life gets more complicated, your investment account lineup also gets more complicated as you make more money and have a family, which is why these are my 4 favorite investment accounts..
    Photo by MIGUEL GASCOJ on Unsplash

    The point in sharing my various account types with you is to give you an idea of how your investment priorities will change over time.

    The most savvy investors know how to match their investment accounts to those changing priorities.

    With this context in mind, let’s now take a closer look at my four favorite investment account types that help me maximize tax benefits.

    With these tax-advantaged accounts, I have a better chance of reaching financial freedom.

    Favorite Account No. 1: 401(k)

    A 401(k) is likely the first investment account most people will have.

    401(k) plans are employer-sponsored retirement plans. Employees can elect to participate in their company’s 401(k) plan and choose from a variety of investment options, usually mutual funds and index funds.

    There are four major reasons to invest in a 401(k) plan.

    1. You can invest with pre-tax dollars.

    That means more of your money gets invested rather than going towards your taxes. When you have more money invested, you can earn more in returns.

    2. Your contributions are automatic.

    Once enrolled, your employer will automatically deduct money from your paycheck and invest it directly into your investment selections.

    Because the money never hits your checking account, you won’t be tempted to spend it on things you don’t really care about. You’ll be used to living without this money because it never hits your account.

    You also don’t have to worry about consistently making transfers into your account because it will happen automatically.

    3. Your earnings grow tax-free.

    In addition to not being taxed on your contributions, you also won’t be taxed on your earnings. That’s a double tax advantage that acts to magnify the power of compound interest. You will be taxed when you make withdrawals.

    4. Your employer may offer a match.

    Many employers today offer a match to incentive employees to contribute to their 401(k) plans. To qualify for the match, you must be participating in your company’s plan and make contributions yourself. The match is usually a percentage of your overall salary, usually between 3-6%.

    For example, if you contribute 5% of your salary, your company may match you with an additional 5% contribution.

    If your company offers a match, it’s a no-brainer to take advantage of that match. It’s often described as “free money.”

    I don’t like the term “free money” because it implies that you have not earned that money as an employee for your company. I prefer to refer to the company match as a bonus you’ve rightfully earned.

    The key is to accept that earned bonus by ensuring you are meeting the minimum requirements to qualify.

    401(k) Contribution Limits and Penalties

    Keep in mind there are annual limits to how much you can contribute to your 401(k) plan. The IRS regularly increases the contribution limits. In 2025, you may contribute up to $23,500.

    If you are between the ages of 50 and 59, or 64 or older, you may contribute an extra $7,500 per year. If you are between the ages of 60 and 63, you may be eligible to contribute up to $11,250.

    Also, remember that 401(k) plans are intended for retirement savings. To discourage early withdrawals, a 10% penalty on top of regular income taxes apply to people under the age of 59 ½.

    Because of these contribution limits, early withdrawal penalties, or other strategic reasons, you may benefit from another type of investment account.

    Let’s look at our next popular type of investment account called a Roth IRA.

    Favorite Account No. 2: Roth IRA.

    A Roth IRA is another type of retirement investment account that also provides double tax benefits.

    Unlike a 401(k), you make after-tax contributions to your Roth IRA. Your earnings then grow-tax free, and your withdrawals are tax-free.

    Another major advantage is that you can withdraw your contributions tax-free and penalty-free at any time.

    There are penalties if you make withdrawals from your earnings before the age of 59 1/2.

    Roth IRA Contribution and Income Limits.

    Because of the amazing tax advantages associated with Roth IRAs, there are income limits that apply. In 2025, individuals must have a Modified Adjusted Gross Income (MAGI) of less than $150,000, and joint filers less than $236,000.

    On top of the income limits, there are annual contribution limits, as well. In 2025, the contribution limits are $7,000 if you’re under age 50, and $8,000 if you’re over age 50.

    Why think about opening a Roth IRA?

    For many investors, it’s not a bad idea to consider opening a Roth IRA in addition to your 401(k).

    For starters, we mentioned the contribution limits to each account. You may need more money in retirement than just what your 401(k) plan will provide.

    For another reason, 401(k) plans and Roth IRAs are treated differently from a tax perspective. It may be wise to have some tax-free income in retirement from a Roth IRA to go along with your taxable income from a 401(k).

    You can open a Roth IRA with any number of investment companies, like Vanguard, Fidelity, and Charles Schwab.

    Favorite Account No. 3: Health Savings Account (HSA)

    A Health Savings Account (HSA) is another tax-advantaged account that you can use to pay for eligible medical expenses.

    HSAs are linked to employer-sponsored health insurance plans. Oftentimes, employers will make an annual contribution to help fund your HSA.

    Physical examination by a Children's Doctor. Teddy's medical check up, illustrating that years from now you can use your HSA to reimburse yourself for prior medical expenses after benefiting from triple tax benefits.
    Photo by Derek Finch on Unsplash

    One of the trade-offs to having an HSA is that you’ll need to enroll in a high deductible insurance plan. You are still covered by insurance, but you’ll pay more out-of-pocket each year for medical treatment.

    But, if you’re relatively healthy and/or have the means to pay for your present day medical care, you stand to benefit immensely down the road.

    That’s because you can choose to invest your HSA contributions just like you might invest in a 401(k) plan. 

    If you do so, your contributions, earnings, and withdrawals are all tax-free if you follow some basic rules.

    Because of these triple tax benefits, HSAs are my absolute favorite investment account.

    Remember, 401(k) plans and Roth IRAs only offer double tax benefits. HSAs are even better because they offer triple tax benefits.

    What are the key rules to follow with HSAs?

    To get the triple tax benefits, you need to follow some basic rules.

    One of the key rules is that you must use your withdrawals for eligible medical expenses. The good news is that “eligible medical expenses” is a very broadly defined term.

    You can take a look here for a comprehensive list of eligible medical expenses. Some examples include prescriptions, contact lenses, and flu shots.

    Another key rule to know is that there are no time limits for when you have to use your HSA funds. As long as you keep your receipts, you can reimburse yourself for eligible medical expenses years, or even decades, later.

    If you put these two rules together, you’ll see why HSAs are so beneficial.

    As long as you have the means to pay out-of-pocket for your current medical expenses, you can allow your pre-tax HSA investments to grow tax free for years.

    That means you can take advantage of the magic of compound interest for decades, tax-free.

    Then, years later, you can withdraw those funds to reimburse yourself for eligible medical expenses you paid for years prior.

    HSA contribution limits.

    Like 401(k) plans and Roth IRAs, there are annual contribution limits for HSAs.

    In 2025, the contribution limit for an individual with self-coverage is $4,300 and $8,550 for family coverage.

    Favorite Account No. 4: 529 College Savings Plan

    529 college savings plans are state-sponsored, tax-advantaged investment accounts.

    While there are certainly other ways to save for college, 529 plans are hard to beat because they typically offer triple tax benefits.

    To read more, check out my in-depth post on 529 Plans for Sky High College Costs:

    529 Plans for Sky High College Costs

    What do you think of my 4 favorite investment accounts?

    There are certainly others, but these are my 4 favorite investment account types. Each comes with tax advantages that will help me reach financial freedom sooner.

    As your life and priorities change, you may also benefit from opening multiple investment account types.

    So, what do you think of my four favorite investment accounts?

    Did I miss any?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Great Talk: Money, Baby Blue, and Friends

    Great Talk: Money, Baby Blue, and Friends

    What’s the best money you’ve spent recently?

    I thought of this question the other day as I sat in the yard. It’s such a simple but important question.

    You should be able to easily feel money well spent. If nothing comes to mind, that might be an indication that the money you are spending has not been well spent.

    The best money I’ve spent recently was on a beautiful Colorado Baby Blue Spruce for my backyard.

    Man, saying that out loud makes me feel old.

    This one purchase gave me an extended, triple happiness boost.

    Buying this tree for my backyard gave me a triple happiness boost.

    First, I enjoyed the process of learning about and choosing the right tree.

    I liked talking trees with the experts at the nursery and my family members. My kids and I would walk around the neighborhood and take pictures of any trees that we liked. It was infectious how excited they were to hunt for beautiful trees.

    Even though my daughter’s first choice was this Easter egg tree, she eventually relented and agreed the Baby Blue was the way to go .

    My daughter's favorite easter egg tree she wanted for the backyard.

    My second happiness boost came from buying and then planting the tree.

    The day I bought the tree, I walked around the nursery in the rain with my father-in-law and picked the actual tree we wanted. I’ve never picked out a tree before, but it was fun. I learned from the experts and enjoyed pretending I knew what I was doing.

    The next day, the landscaping crew came over to plant the tree. It was fun to strategize exactly where to put it and then watch the experts execute the plan.

    My third happiness boost came the next day with the tree in the ground and my kids running around the back yard.

    My son played with his toys at the base of the tree. He and his sister played hide-and-seek and took advantage of the new hiding spot.

    The whole time I watched them, I sat with a smile on my face. I expect that feeling will continue every time I look at Baby Blue in my yard.

    So, yeah, Baby Blue was money well spent.

    And yeah, I know. I’m old.

    Baby Blue brought me joy before, during, and after the purchase.

    Baby Blue is an example of the trifecta of happiness. It brought me joy before, during and after.

    The same happiness effect has been well-documented when it comes to traveling. People get a happiness boost in planning the trip, then taking the trip, and finally remembering all the fun things they did on the trip.

    That’s why so many people “love to travel.” It brings them happiness before, during, and after.

    Baby Blue taught me that I can spend money to get that same triple happiness boost even when not traveling.

    I recently met up with an old friend for a great talk about money.

    I experienced the same trifecta recently when I met up with an old friend for a great talk about money.

    Funny enough, we reconnected after he learned from a mutual friend that I had launched Think and Talk Money. I had no idea that he’s as fascinated about personal finance as I am.

    I had been looking forward to our “date” since we planned it a couple weeks ago.

    The conversation was great. We talked about money, careers, kids, and shared friends. We hadn’t seen each other for years, but you would never know it. That’s the sign of a good friendship.

    When the check came, I was delighted to spend my money. That conversation brought me a lot of happiness.

    Since we met up, I’ve been revisiting in my mind so many of the topics we covered. I’m already looking forward to the next time we get together.

    That’s money well spent.

    Personal finance is not just about the numbers.

    In the personal finance world, we spend a lot of time talking about numbers. That’s not a bad thing. Numbers help us turn our ultimate life goals into quantifiable action steps.

    However, saying you want to “buy a house” is nice, but it’s not that helpful for planning purposes.

    Saying you want to “save $100,000 for a down payment on a house in the next 3 years” is an improvement.

    Running the numbers and committing to saving $2,800/month to achieve that goal is even better.

    So, while numbers are certainly important in personal finance, it’s equally important to continuously recognize the emotions behind those numbers.

    Those emotions turn into our motivation to stay on track and hit our numbers.

    Personal finance is tied to our emotions.

    I spent money on Baby Blue. In exchange, I received a triple happiness boost. The same is true about catching up with an old friend. These experiences reminded me of why I care about money.

    Money is nothing but a tool. I care about money because I want to wield that tool to bring me and my family happiness.

    Happiness is hard to define. Spending money in exchange for happiness can be hard to accomplish. What has helped me in that regard is thinking about how I can use money to get what I want.

    Sunshine bath illustrating the triple happiness boost spending money the right way can give you.
    Photo by Zac Durant on Unsplash

    Sometimes, that means taking a deep look at my Money Why. Or, it could mean sitting on a beach with a notepad (and maybe a beer or two) and writing down my Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom.

    But, thinking about money is not just about long term goals.

    It also means how we spend our money in the present.

    Humans are emotional creatures. We can rationally look at examples and charts and won’t dispute the long term magic of compound interest.

    At the same time, we have emotions and feelings that need to be tended to now.

    It’s not realistic to expect people to put off all happiness until some unknown time in the future.

    It is realistic to make reasonable sacrifices now to ensure a better future.

    That’s the essence of investing. We invest money that we could spend today and hope it turns into more money later on.

    What might be a reasonable sacrifice for one person may be totally unreasonable for someone else. That’s perfectly fine. Still, it’s one thing to make sacrifices. It’s another thing to deprive ourselves entirely.

    I don’t think it’s reasonable to expect people to entirely deprive themselves of the things that make them happy. The key is understanding what those things are, and then spending our money in the pursuit of those things.

    This is one of the things my friend and I talked about the other day. It’s not that hard to understand the numbers on the spreadsheet. It’s much more difficult to stay motivated to keep making good money choices.

    This intersection of money and life is what makes personal finance so fascinating.

    Personal finance is fascinating, not because of the numbers, but because of the emotional impact of money.

    It’s why I encourage people to talk about money with their loved ones. Talking money is not about talking numbers and spreadsheets. It’s about motivating each other to intentionally use money in a way that aligns with our values. And, to do so both in the present and in the future.

    When we create a Budget After Thinking, this is exactly what we’re doing. Not only are we generating fuel for our Later Money bucket, we are giving ourselves permission to spend our Life Money on things we truly care about.

    So, what’s the best money you’ve spent recently?

    I bought a tree.

    I had a beer with a friend.

    Sure, I could have saved that money and invested it. But, I’m glad I didn’t.

    Both experiences continue to bring me joy.

    That’s money well spent.

  • Money on My Mind: Financial Literacy Month

    Money on My Mind: Financial Literacy Month

    April is known as National Financial Literacy Month.

    That’s cool. It’s never a bad idea to pay a little extra attention to your finances.

    Of course, Think and Talk Money readers don’t wait until April to be reminded of all the things we should be doing with our money.

    With more than 50 posts already at our disposal, Think and Talk Money readers pay attention to our money year round.

    We know how important money is to reaching our ultimate goals in life. That’s why we like to think and talk money just a little bit every week.

    Think and Talk Money readers know that personal finance starts with getting our money mindset in the right place. That’s why we create our personal version of Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom.

    With the right mindset, we can stay on budget and consistently generate fuel for our investments.

    When other people get worked up over the stock market, we talk to our people and stay calm.

    We know that time is on our side.

    Plus, investing is actually the easy part.

    We control what we a control. That’s why we invest early and often to get the maximum benefit of compound interest.

    So, Think and Talk Money readers don’t need a national personal finance month.

    And, we’re happy that personal finance gets a little extra attention each year in April.

    aerial photography of flowers at daytime in April, personal finance month, which Think and Talk Money readers don't need.
    Photo by Joel Holland on Unsplash

    These credit card fees are getting out of hand.

    Is it just me, or are you also noticing more and more businesses charging fees to use credit cards?

    I wrote about my disdain for credit card fees recently. 

    In just the past couple of weeks, I’ve chosen to pay with cash instead of credit card on multiple occasions:

    • At the butcher shop, which charges a 3% fee, and is kind of smug about it.
    • At the local ice cream shop, which charges a 4% fee and misleadingly labels it a 4% discount for customers paying in cash.
    • For the garage door repair guy, who creatively indicates the fee in terms of cash instead of a percentage. In this instance, $11 instead of 3% of the total bill.
    • At the tree nursery, which also charges a 3% fee for credit cards. This one hurt the most. Trees are expensive! I really would have liked those points.

    By paying cash, I avoided hundreds of dollars in fees. Don’t get me wrong, I love credit cards points as much as anyone. But, I just can’t stomach paying these fees to earn the points.

    I even ran the numbers recently and determined that the points don’t make up for the added penalty of using a card.

    I know many business owners disagree, but in my opinion, these fees are bad for business.

    Fees act as a deterrent for me to spend money. I imagine they are a deterrent for others, as well. If I do shop at one of these establishments, I end up being more selective and spending less money than I otherwise would have.

    • At the butcher shop, I didn’t buy the side items to go with my skirt steaks. 
    • At the ice cream shop, I bought ice cream for my kids but not for myself. Luckily (or unluckily?), my son gave me his leftover, melty Superman ice cream with rainbow sprinkles.
    • I had no choice with the garage door guy- the garage was broken and needed fixing. You win, garage door guy!
    • At the tree nursery, I bought half as many trees and plants as I intended. 

    The way I see it, both the customer and the business lose out because of these fees. 

    For example, at the nursery, I didn’t get all the plants I wanted. That made me kind of sad.

    At the same time, the nursery lost out on more than $1,000 in plant sales. I don’t know how that made the business feel. Obviously, it’s not that sad since it continues to charge the fee.

    Taking a broader viewpoint, maybe these credit card fees are actually good for us consumers.

    In our consumer-driven society, we all spend too much money when we go out to eat or go shopping. Studies have consistently proven that we spend less money when forced to use cash.

    In that sense, a deterrent to spending, which is exactly what these fees are, is probably a good thing for us consumers. 

    I can’t imagine it’s good for business, though.

    What do you think?

    It’s OK that tracking your net worth is less fun during a market dip.

    I track my net worth once per month using a simple spreadsheet. Today was the first day I updated the spreadsheet since “Liberation Day” and markets dipped.

    Like so many others, my net worth took a hit this past month.

    That’s not fun.

    But, I’m not losing my mind over it.

    I’m not saying it feels good. I would much rather see my net worth steadily improving.

    A Yellow Warbler sits in a flowering tree on a sunny spring morning during financial literacy month, which Think and Talk Money readers don't need.
    Photo by Mark Olsen on Unsplash

    I’m just saying I’m not freaking out about it. Time is on my side. 

    I expect dips like this will occur multiple times throughout my investing timeline.

    One thing I’ve found is that it helps to talk about money when things aren’t going well. You realize that you’re not alone. Your friends and family are probably having the same feelings that you’re having.

    You don’t have to share how much money you have or how much you lost. You can still benefit emotionally by acknowledging to your loved ones that you’re thinking about the markets a little bit more these days.

    People are going bananas for The Bananas.

    A reader sent in a great story about a couple who went $1.8 million into debt to start The Savannah Bananas.

    If you haven’t heard of The Bananas, they might just be the best story in sports right now.

    Despite countless opportunities to cash in by taking on investors, the owners still own 100% of the team. They continue to do things their way, even if that means foregoing massive profits.

    I love stories like this. These owners bet on themselves and found success. Instead of cashing in at the first chance, they’re staying true to themselves.

    At the end of the day, they’re making money and seem to enjoy what they’re doing. 

    Is there anything better than that?

  • Happy that I Delayed Financial Independence

    Happy that I Delayed Financial Independence

    I’m further away from financial independence today than I was five years ago.

    You know what’s funny?

    I couldn’t be happier about where I am today.

    Let me explain.

    In 2020, my wife and I had very minimal expenses.

    At the start of 2020, my wife and I were both working as lawyers in Chicago. We lived in an apartment in a 4-flat that we had purchased in 2018. We had no kids at the start of the year, but were about to welcome our first.

    This was a good apartment in a popular part of town. It had 3 bedrooms and 2.5 bathrooms. That was plenty of space for my wife and I, and eventually the two babies we brought home there.

    We purchased this 4-flat from a real estate investor who had done a decent job on the renovation. It had in-unit washer/dryer, modern finishes, and plenty of storage.

    We had a small outdoor patio with enough room for a grill and little table. We also had a garage parking space but ended up parking our 20-year-old car on the street most days.

    When we purchased the building, it was the most expensive 4-flat that had ever been sold in that part of town. It was a bit of a risk to set the high-water mark in the area.

    In the end, the risk was more than worth it.

    Even though the building was expensive for the area, this was not a fancy apartment. This part of town was still up-and-coming. Some people probably thought it was not a nice part of town.

    I doubt many people came over and thought, “Wow, look at this amazing apartment!”

    The more likely reaction was probably something like, “What the heck are they doing?”

    To be fair, I asked myself that question plenty of times.

    So, what were we doing?

    We were paying ourselves to live there.

    Say that again?

    My wife and I paid ourselves to live in that apartment.

    We lived for free. And made a profit at the same time.

    See, the rental income from the other three units covered the entire mortgage plus all expenses for the property.

    But, that’s not all. On top of covering all the expenses, the rental units generated a profit of $1,000 per month on average.

    So, not only did we spend zero dollars each month on housing, we profited $1,000 per month.

    Looking back, getting paid to live in a decent apartment was maybe the best decision we ever made.

    Landlord working outside the office checking his balance and earnings. Getting paid concept. Internet money income. Showing the power of house hacking even if it means delaying financial independence.

    What happens to your finances when you live for free?

    Let’s take a look at how living for free can be a major advantage on your way to financial freedom.

    The common wisdom is for people to spend no more than 30% of their gross income on housing. Regardless of how much you make, that usually means thousands of dollars.

    Because our tenants were paying our living expenses for us, we did not have that expense for the five years we lived in that apartment.

    In other words, we didn’t have to worry about budgeting for housing.

    We also drove a nearly 20-year-old car and could walk to the “L” (Chicago’s subway). We lived in a neighborhood with plenty of nearby restaurants and shops. That meant our transportation costs were next to nothing.

    Because we weren’t paying for housing and had very minimal transportation costs, we could supercharge our savings.

    How much were we able to save?

    Let’s take a look.

    Between 2018 and 2023, my wife and I acquired three buildings and ten apartments in that same neighborhood. We’re very familiar with market rents in the area.

    We rent our apartments for anywhere from $2,300 to $3,600 per month. Our usual tenants are professionals like engineers, lawyers, doctors, consultants, and pilots.

    The unit we were living in from 2018 to 2022 was one of our larger units. At the time, it would have rented for $3,500 per month on average. That equals $42,000 per year to rent that apartment.

    Keep in mind, if someone was paying rent to live there, that would be $42,000 of after-tax money.

    Since we owned the building, we lived there for free. We could save that $42,000 we would have otherwise paid in rent. Instead of spending that savings on things we didn’t need, we were able to save that money for our next real estate investment.

    Plus, we earned $1,000 on average per month while we lived there. That’s an additional $12,000 per year in profit.

    We lived in that unit for almost five years.

    Add it all up and we saved $270,000 by living in that apartment for five years.

    • $42,000 saved rent x 5 years =$210,000.
    • $12,000 profits x 5 years = $60,000.
    • Total savings = $270,000

    We used that $270,000 for a downpayment on a rental condo in Colorado ski country.

    It took five years of living in a decent, but not-awesome, apartment to have a ski condo that will hopefully be in our family for decades.

    Choosing to live in our 4-flat to save $270,000 over five years was one of the best financial decisions we’ve ever made.

    Snowboarders breath on a cold day illustrating the power of financial independence earned through house hacking.
    Photo by Alain Wong on Unsplash

    I highly recommend you consider house hacking if you’d like to start investing in real estate.

    Many of you are familiar with the strategy of living in a building (or home) you own while tenants (or roommates) pay for it. Brandon Turner, of BiggerPockets fame, popularized the concept he dubbed “House Hacking”.

    You can read all about house hacking on BiggerPockets here.

    For even more information on house hacking, Craig Curelop wrote a book for BiggerPockets called The House Hacking Strategy: How to Use Your Home to Achieve Financial Freedom.

    Without a doubt, there is no better strategy for entry level real estate investors than house hacking. I gave you a glimpse of the financial upside earlier in this post.

    Besides the financial upside, it’s like landlording with training wheels. Since you live on site, you can more easily learn how to manage a rental property, including responding to tenants and handling routine maintenance.

    The naysayers will say something like, “I don’t want to live with my tenants. They’re going to stress me out. I don’t want to be bothered at 2 a.m.”

    Ignore them.

    My wife and I lived with our tenants for five years at this property and two more years at a subsequent property. We did this while working full-time jobs as lawyers and raising two kids.

    Because we didn’t listen to the naysayers, we now have four income-generating properties and our “forever home” just outside Chicago.

    Even though we’re no longer living for free, the income from our rental properties is enough to cover the expenses of our home.

    So, why am I further away from financial independence today?

    I’m further away from financial independence today because my expenses have gone up since 2020. I’ve already alluded to those increased expenses throughout the post.

    In 2020, we had our first child. Now, we have three children.

    Also, after seven years of house hacking, we decided it was time to purchase a long-term home for our growing family just outside the city in a terrific area.

    We also finally traded in our 21-year-old car for our first new car ever.

    How’s this for easy math:

    Three Children + Nice House + New Car = Further Away from Financial Independence

    While that combination means I’m further away from reaching financial independence, I now have everything that I could possibly ever want.

    That’s why I couldn’t be happier with where I’m at today.

    My end game is finally in sight. Five years ago, I didn’t know where I’d be living or what car I’d be driving or what my family situation might be.

    Now, the picture is clear.

    I can calculate with reasonable certainty how much money I need to be truly financially independent. I can use that number as a target and make every financial decision with that target in mind.

    That’s why in 2025, I’m focused on paying down HELOC debt. Each time I make a debt payment, I move closer to financial independence.

    Besides, my goal is FIPE not FIRE.

    My goal is to reach FIPE not FIRE.

    FIPE means Financial Independence, Pivot Early.

    I have no intentions of retiring any time soon. Retiring early is not, and has never been, my goal.

    My goal is to become financially independent to create as many options as possible to protect myself and my family. I want to be financially independent so I can pivot no matter what life throws at me.

    If my goal was to retire early, I may have skipped the single family home in a great neighborhood. I could have continued house hacking, minimized my expenses, and lived off of the rest of the rental income.

    But, I want more for me and my family. I don’t want to just survive.

    Have you delayed financial independence to craft the life you really want?

    My life has certainly changed in the past five years, but all that change has been for the better.

    That meant house hacking at first to keep expenses as low as possible. Now it means enjoying the wealth I created by making those earlier sacrifices.

    In order to have the life I want, I needed to temporarily move further away from financial independence.

    Still, I’m confident that I’ve taken the right steps to not just reach financial independence, but to reach it while living the life I want.

    The tradeoff is that it will take me longer to be truly financially independent. I’m perfectly happy with that.

    Financial independence has never been more clearly in sight. It’s just delayed a little bit.

    • Is your goal to reach FIPE and pivot as quickly as possible?
    • Or, are you OK with delaying FIPE temporarily for the life you truly want?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • FIPE not FIRE: Financial Independence, Pivot Early

    FIPE not FIRE: Financial Independence, Pivot Early

    We focus a lot on financial independence here at Think and Talk Money. That’s because achieving financial independence is the ultimate goal for most of us.

    To me, financial independence does not mean retiring.

    That’s why I don’t like the popular acronym, FIRE: Financial Independence, Retire Early.

    Instead, I I like to view my financial freedom journey as FIPE: Financial Independence, Pivot Early.

    Let me explain why I believe in FIPE not FIRE.

    FIPE = Financial Independence, Pivot Early

    Whatever it is that you truly want to do in life, financial independence makes it possible.

    When you have financial independence, you have options. You can make decisions based on your core values instead of making decisions based on money. You can pivot, if necessary.

    Financial independence is for people who want to be empowered to take more control of what they do with their working hours.

    It’s not about quitting work. It’s about the freedom to pivot to other work, if you want. I’m convinced that humans are meant to be productive. We are social creatures who at our core want to be contributing.

    That doesn’t mean we have to be or want to be employees. But, it does mean that we want to do something meaningful with our working hours every week.

    That’s why I believe in the power of pivoting, not retiring.

    Why I don’t like the name FIRE.

    Part of the misconception about financial independence may stem from the name of the popular personal finance concept known as FIRE: Financial Independence, Retire Early.

    It’s not uncommon for people to hear financial independence and immediately think that’s only for people who want to quit their jobs and retire. That’s how widespread FIRE has become in the personal finance space.

    I agree with so many of the principles of FIRE. I just don’t agree with the name.

    Financial independence is about much more than retiring early.

    FIRE emphasizes saving more and spending less until you reach the point where your passive investments generate enough income to allow you to quit your job.

    I love this part of FIRE: the idea of creating enough income streams so that you have the freedom to do what you want with your time. I share the primary goal of saving more money and spending less to achieve more life freedom.

    I call this Parachute Money. I like to view each income stream as a separate parachute string. The more parachute strings you have, the safer it is to make a big change in life.

    The problem for me is that the FIRE end game is suggested right there in the name: become financially independent so you can retire.

    I don’t like that part. I don’t like what the word “retire” implies.

    If you look it up, you’ll see that the word “retire“means to withdraw, to retreat, to recede.

    None of those things sound appealing to me at all.

    Each word implies moving backwards. I’m not working so hard to achieve financial freedom so I can move backwards in life.

    Fire burning on beach, depicting the FIRE movement: Financial Independence, Retire Early instead of FIPE: Financial Independence, Pivot Early.
    Photo by Benjamin DeYoung on Unsplash

    I prefer to think of financial independence in terms of creating options. I prefer to think of financial independence as a way to move forward in life.

    I think “pivot” better reflects that mission.

    Pivot means to adapt or improve through modifications and adjustments.

    That sounds so much more appealing to me.

    With FIPE, financial independence is still the primary goal. But, the endgame is not to withdraw or retreat. The endgame is to adapt and improve how you spend your working hours.

    FIPE = Financial Independence, Pivot Early.

    Granted, the name “FIPE” is not as catchy as FIRE.

    But, I think it actually better encapsulates the entire purpose of financial independence in the first place.

    To explain, let’s look back at the modern day origin of FIRE for a minute.

    Vicki Robin and Joe Dominguez are often credited for laying the groundwork for the modern day FIRE movement. Robin and Dominguez wrote an incredible book called Your Money or Your Life.

    It’s one of my favorite personal finance books. You should definitely read it if financial independence is important to you.

    In their book, Robin and Dominguez have a lot to say about the relationship between money, work, and time. 

    Guess what?

    Most of us are doing it all wrong.

    Most of us make the mistake of chasing money at the cost of our precious time. When you read Your Money or Your Life, you will start to value your time for what it’s really worth.

    By making good choices about how to earn money- and as importantly what to do with that money- you can get the most out of your money and your life.

    That’s what FIRE is really all about. It’s about choosing to use your working hours in a way that is more meaningful to you than clocking in-and-out as an employee each day.

    It’s not about retiring from meaningful work. It’s about pivoting to work that is more meaningful to you.

    FIRE proponents would likely agree that the goal is not to withdraw or retreat.

    I think proponents of FIRE would actually agree with me that the end game is really not about withdrawing or retreating. The mission is always about moving forward, not backwards.

    My belief is that people who are disciplined and skilled enough to reach financial independence in the first place are the type of people who don’t retreat or withdraw.

    They may opt for periods of temporary retirement, as they should. But, I don’t think financially independent people are truly wired for full-time retirement.

    That’s why you see so many people who have obtained financial independence continue to pursue income streams.

    That might mean managing real estate investments, teaching others, or even starting a financial freedom blog.

    So, technically speaking, most people who have obtained financial independence have not actually retired. They haven’t withdrawn or retreated. Instead, they have pivoted.

    They are now spending their working hours doing other things. They may not be working full-time for an employer, but they’re still working.

    They’ve achieved financial independence and have earned the right to pivot.

    Financial Independence, Pivot Early.

    Even FIRE leaders would likely agree that the end game is not to completely retire.

    FIRE is not about retiring or quitting. It’s about pivoting to more meaningful life pursuits.

    I don’t want to speak for Robin, but I think this is what she was getting at.

    I also think this is what modern day FIRE leaders like Mr. Money Mustache and the Financial Samurai believe in. Not long ago, Financial Samurai actually wrote an excellent post called “Why Early Retirement / FIRE is Becoming Obsolete.”

    I just think the name FIRE doesn’t accurately portray the mission. Pivoting early seems more appropriate to me than retiring early.

    We all have the same goals in mind: financial independence. And, I believe we have the same end game in mind: pivoting to more meaningful work.

    That’s why I like FIPE instead of FIRE.

    Are you looking to retire early or simply to pivot?

    What is it that you’re aiming for by getting your personal finances in order? If you want to retire early, there’s nothing at all wrong with that. You may be at the point in your career and life where that makes sense.

    Personally, I’m not looking to retire early. That’s why I like to view financial independence as a chance to pivot.

    Pivoting doesn’t mean you have to switch jobs or change things up just for the sake of change. It just means that you have that option if you want it or need it.

    By the way, I’m not alone in viewing financial independence as a chance to pivot instead of retire.

    Scott Trench, CEO and President of BiggerPockets has been beating this drum for a while. He’s also talked about it on the BiggerPockets Money podcast.

    I’m in complete alignment with Trench. I like almost everything about FIRE, just not what the name implies. 

    With FIPE, the goal is not to retire. The goal is to give yourself the freedom to choose what to do next.

    Whether you want to retire early or just pivot to a new chapter in your life, being good with money is key.

    Do you like the name FIRE or FIPE?

    At the end of the day, whether you like to view it as FIRE or FIPE, the mission is the same. We are all looking for the freedom to choose what to do next.

    When striving for financial independence, the goal is to create options. Those options likely include pivoting to more meaningful work, rather than withdrawing or retreating.

    Personally, I think the name FIPE better encapsulates that mission.

    • Do you agree?
    • What name resonates more with you on your financial freedom journey?
    • Are you interested in retiring early or pivoting early?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • My Journey to Financial Freedom

    My Journey to Financial Freedom

    Financial freedom doesn’t happen overnight. I’ve been on my journey to financial freedom for more than a decade.

    I’m not there yet.

    Here’s a look at how my journey to financial freedom has progressed since I graduated law school in 2009.

    My journey to financial freedom began in my late-20s and was focused on eliminating debt.

    In my 20s, I needed to pay off credit card debt and student loan debt. All I knew about the journey to financial freedom back then was that it seemed very far away.

    I started budgeting, which meant reigning in my spending on things I didn’t really care about.

    I began to establish good money habits. It wasn’t easy, and I was far from perfect. That’s OK. The 80/20 rule reminds us that we don’t need to aim for perfection.

    By the way, my life didn’t all of a sudden become boring and miserable when I became more money conscious. Quite the opposite, actually.

    I became more confident in myself because I had a plan. I no longer felt like I was sliding backwards. With each paycheck, I moved one step closer to erasing my debt. That was a powerful feeling.

    In my early-30s, my journey to financial freedom was about fueling my savings.

    By the time I turned 30, I had paid off my credit card debt and my student loan debt. I’ll never forget the day I made my last student loan payment as my family and I were heading out to Colorado. A huge weight had been lifted from my shoulders.

    I felt free. My journey to financial freedom was still in the early stages, but I was on my way. Most importantly, I still had good habits and a plan.

    The byproduct of eliminating my debt was that I had more fuel to accomplish my other goals.

    Financial Freedom wooden sign with a beach on background, illustrating that my journey to financial freedom and the journey to financial freedom for lawyers and professionals does not happen over night.

    What other goals?

    The money I had been allocating to student loan and credit card debt could now be put towards more fun goals and experiences.

    Instead of aimlessly spending the thousands of dollars each month that had been going towards debt, I rolled that money directly into savings. Highest on my list was saving for an engagement ring.

    Within a year, I had enough saved to purchase the ring. I thought being free from debt was strong motivation. Turns out that motivation was nothing compared to the desire to buy a ring for the woman you love.

    As your career progresses and you earn more money, you will benefit from strong personal finance habits.

    As my career progressed, like many of you, I started earning more money. When I earned more, I did my best to use that additional income as fuel for my goals.

    I’m grateful I had previously learned strong personal finance habits on my journey to financial freedom when I earned relatively little.

    For most of us, our usual career progression is the exact opposite of the typical lottery winner. Who hasn’t heard the stories about the lottery winners that hit it big and then quickly go broke?

    These stories are unfortunately all too common. What starts out with so much elation usually ends in tragedy.

    The normal downfall involves unrestrained spending on things like houses, cars, and extravagant nights out. It also involves the pressure to give money away to family, friends, and charities.

    The same pattern has been well-documented for professional athletes who earn millions before quickly going broke.

    The challenge is the same for lottery winners and professional athletes. They come into a lot of money suddenly without any prior personal finance education. When this happens, that money disappears quickly.

    What can we learn from lottery winners and professional athletes?

    I think it’s safe to say that none of us are going to win the lottery or earn millions as a professional athlete. I hope I’m wrong about that!

    But, we can still fall victim to the same set of challenges on the journey to financial freedom. It may not be a sudden rise and then an equally sudden drop-off. Our financial growth presents itself more slowly.

    Over time, we may earn referrals/commissions, raises, and bonuses. These earnings certainly add up and can make a huge difference in our lives, if we have a plan. That’s a big “if” for most of us.

    I didn’t have the full plan figured out in my 20s. Our goals change as life changes. There’s nothing wrong with that.

    That said, because of the steps I took in my 20s to learn about personal finance, I was better prepared for the opportunities and challenges that arose in my 30s. I learned that when you create a solid foundation for yourself, you have options.

    To me, life is all about giving yourself options. Nobody likes feeling stuck, including me.

    In my mid-30s, my journey to financial freedom was about building wealth through real estate.

    Besides saving for an engagement ring and a wedding, I was able to save up for a downpayment on a home. At the time I started saving up for a home, I had no idea that I could use my savings to invest in real estate.

    It wasn’t until I went to a Cubs game with a good friend of mine, The Professor, that I learned about real estate investing.

    This is when my journey to financial freedom really accelerated.

    See, The Professor had a beautiful condo with an incredible rooftop deck near Wrigley Field. During the game, he told me he was selling the condo and moving into a 4-flat with his fiancee in an up-and-coming part of town.

    Huh?

    Why on earth would you give up your amazing condo? And move to a random neighborhood I’d maybe been to one time in my life?

    I thought The Professor had lost his mind. Back then, I had no idea what a 4-flat even was. I couldn’t even point to his new neighborhood on a map of Chicago.

    The Ivy at Wrigley Field illustrating when Matthew Adair accelerated his journey to financial freedom through real estate investing.

    The Professor set me straight.

    He walked me through the numbers. He explained that he was going from paying $3,000 per month for his condo to receiving $700 per month on top of living for free in the 4-flat. That’s a $3,700 difference per month!

    The Professor also introduced me to BiggerPockets. That was huge for me because I believe in the motto, “Trust but verify.”

    Over the next week, I read everything I could and listened to podcasts every day. It didn’t take long before I was convinced that I wanted a 4-flat of my own.

    Eight years later, I own three buildings and 10 apartments in that same Chicago neighborhood. I have a ski rental condo in Colorado.

    Without that great talk with The Professor, I don’t think I would be where I am today on my journey to financial freedom.

    Man I’m glad The Professor wasn’t afraid to talk money with me!

    He knew that taking about money is not taboo.

    We all need to position ourselves to benefit when luck comes our way.

    I was fortunate to have learned from The Professor’s experience. We all need some luck on the journey to financial freedom. I’m convinced that we’ll all catch a break here or there. The question is what we do with that luck when it comes our way.

    If I hadn’t taken the time to learn about personal finance in my 20s, I wouldn’t have been positioned to benefit from that conversation with The Professor.

    That’s why I say the journey to financial freedom doesn’t happen over night. It’s about one building block at a time.

    For any aspiring real estate investors out there, please take that message to heart. Before you can successfully invest in real estate, you have to invest in your own financial literacy.

    I’ve learned firsthand that the same principles that apply to personal finances apply to managing a real estate portfolio. Each pursuit takes a plan that only works with discipline and patience.

    In my late-30s, my journey to financial freedom was about paying off debt.

    In my late-30s, my journey to financial freedom pivoted from acquiring properties to optimizing my portfolio. My wife and I decided we were ready to transition from growing our real estate portfolio to paying off our debt.

    In a way, I’ve come full circle on my journey to financial freedom.

    We owe a lot of credit to Chad “Coach” Carson and his excellent book, Small and Mighty Real Estate Investor: How to Reach Financial Freedom with Fewer Rental Properties.

    Reading Small and Mighty Real Estate Investor helped us conclude that at this point in our lives, we have enough. Our portfolio generates enough income to help fuel our current goals. If we were to continue expanding, the headaches could end up outweighing the financial benefits.

    Progress is not linear, either. I’ve taken on debt in the form of mortgages and HELOCs to invest in more real estate.

    In the short term, that mortgage debt pulls me further away from financial freedom.

    If my plan works, that same debt will push me more rapidly to financial freedom.

    Financial freedom through real estate has existed for decades, if not centuries.

    By the way, I didn’t invent the plan of achieving financial freedom through real estate. That idea has existed for decades, if not centuries. I’d avoid anyone who tells you they pioneered this concept.

    Years ago, I remember sharing my newfound passion for real estate with mom. She had this smile on her face as I excitedly shared this “new” phenomenon of investing in real estate to achieve financial freedom.

    The next time I saw her, I realized her smile was actually more of a smirk.

    She handed me a book called How You Can Become Financially Independent by Investing in Real Estate.

    It was written by Albert J. Lowry, Ph. D.

    In 1977!

    Picture of a financial independence book showing that my journey to financial freedom through real estate is a concept that has existed for decades.

    Financial Freedom doesn’t happen over night.

    It’s natural to want to jump to the finish line. I’m guilty of that, too. I think about achieving financial freedom every day and need to remind myself to take it one step at a time.

    Even with all I’ve learned about personal finance, it can sometimes feel like I’m heading in the wrong direction.

    Wherever you currently are on your journey to financial freedom, remember that it doesn’t happen over night. I need to constantly remind myself to stay the course.

    Keep coming back to Think and Talk Money for daily reminders that financial freedom is within all of our grasps.

  • The Biggest Money Question: What is Your Money Why?

    The Biggest Money Question: What is Your Money Why?

    What is your Money Why?

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    It’s that simple. #thinkandtalkmoney #mywhy #financialfreedom #firemovement #personalfinance #moneywellness #realestateinvesting

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    I had the happiest occasion to think about that question this past week.

    My wife and I welcomed our third child, a little baby girl.

    We were very fortunate and had a smooth delivery process.

    Even so, when you’re in the delivery room, your mind runs wild. You just want everything to go well. It’s completely out of your hands by that point.

    Things get really interesting when you’ve been at the hospital for a while and haven’t slept. There’s no telling where your mind will go.

    No matter how much you tell yourself not to do it, you can’t help but think of all that can go wrong.

    During these moments, I can assure you that one thing you’re not thinking about is money. If anything, you’re thinking that you would trade all the money you have for a healthy baby and a healthy mom.

    I guarantee you won’t be thinking about free falling markets. You’re not thinking about setting up a 529 college savings plan, either.

    When you finally hold your new baby, nothing else in the world matters. Everything around you goes quiet. The sense of relief is overwhelming and you cry.

    It’s a beautiful thing.

    In those first few moments, I told my baby girl that I love her. I promised that I will always protect her. Whatever she needs, I will be there.

    If I want to keep that promise, I need to be good with money.

    To be good with money, I need a powerful Money Why.

    Matthew Adair, founder of Think and Talk Money, holding his baby girl and remembering why he wants to be good with money.

    What is my Money Why?

    I’ve known my Money Why since I wrote down my Tiara Goals for Financial Freedom on a beach in 2017. My number one Tiara Goal for Financial Freedom is to be with my wife and kids as much as I want.

    I wrote down that goal before I was even married or had kids.

    Years later, my Money Why hasn’t changed. The only thing that’s changed is my Money Why has gotten stronger and stronger since then.

    • In 2017, my Money Why got stronger when I got married.
    • Then in 2020, my Money Why got stronger when my daughter was born.
    • Again in 2022, my Money Why got stronger when my son was born.
    • This week, my Money Why got stronger when my baby girl was born.

    My Money Why has never been more clear. It doesn’t even matter if my brain is functioning at half speed right now on limited sleep.

    My Money Why is my baby girl, my son, and my daughter. My Money Why is my wife.

    Of course, I want to provide for my family financially.

    But my Money Why is more than that.

    I don’t want to just provide money, I want to provide time. And, I want to be present and share experiences.

    Most of all, I want to be with them.

    My overall goal in life is to spend as much time as possible with the people who are meaningful to me. To accomplish that goal, I need to be good with money.

    If I’m good with my money, I can achieve financial freedom.

    With financial freedom, I can choose how to spend my time. That means I can choose who to spend my time with.

    My Money Why is not about being rich.

    Saying that I want to be good with money is not the same thing as saying that I want to be rich. Funny enough, people that are good with money oftentimes feel rich regardless of what their net worth is.

    As nicely put by Sam Dogen, founder of Financial Samurai, one of the preeminent personal finance blogs:

    But I’ve noticed on my path to financial freedom there were several times when I felt incredibly rich and money wasn’t the dominant reason.

    I couldn’t agree more with Dogen. There’s no richer feeling than having just come home from the hospital with a healthy baby girl. That feeling has nothing to do with money.

    Check out more from Dogen at his website financialsamurai.com. There’s a reason why he is one of the leading voices in the personal finance space.

    Simply making a lot of money will not make you feel rich.

    On the flip side, people that make a lot of money but are not good with money often feel like they’re struggling to get by. As CNBC explained after talking with financial psychologists:

    Whether you’re aiming to save more cash or boost your overall earnings, it’s important to ask yourself what you hope to achieve by obtaining more money, Chaffin says. Otherwise, if you don’t change your internal money beliefs, you may still feel anxious about money even if you hit millionaire status.

    The takeaway is that it is pointless to make money without stopping to think why you want that money and what you’re going to do with it.

    If you’ve never thought about money that way before, here are three three powerful reasons to get you started:

    1. Money can give you choices.
    2. Money can give you personal power.
    3. And, money can give you time.

    Money is nothing but a tool that you can manipulate to get what you truly want out of life. The thing is, you have to actually think about what you want if you are going to use that tool effectively.

    Don’t wait for a major life event to start thinking about money.

    You don’t have to wait until you have a baby to start thinking about what money can do for you. In fact, if you wait for a major life event like that, it’s going to be a lot harder than if you start thinking now.

    Ask yourself:

    “What is my Money Why?”

    Whatever comes to mind, write it down.

    Maybe you want to retire early. Maybe you’re just looking for a life pivot, as Scott Trench, CEO and President of BiggerPockets wrote about recently and has regularly discussed on the BiggerPockets Money podcast.

    I personally agree with Trench, and I like almost everything about FIRE, which stands for Financially Independent Retire Early. It’s just that I know that retiring early is not for me.

    I prefer to think of it as FIPE:

    Financially Independent Pivot Early

    With FIPE, the goal is not to retire. The goal is to give yourself the freedom to choose what to do next.

    Whether you want to retire early or just pivot to a new chapter in your life, being good with money is key.

    Besides, I’ve never seen the point in working endless hours to make money, while spending hardly any time seriously thinking about how to keep that money.

    What’s your Money Why?

    My Money Why gets clearer by the day. It has never been more clear than it is right now after bringing home a little baby girl.

    • What is your Money Why?
    • Has your Money Why changed over time?
    • How does your Money Why impact your relationship with money?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • Top 10 Student Loan Tips for Lawyers and Professionals

    Top 10 Student Loan Tips for Lawyers and Professionals

    Student loans are…heavy.

    That’s it.

    They’re. Just. Heavy.

    They’re a weight that we carry around long before we even make the first repayment. Sometimes that weight feels so heavy, it’s hard to imagine it ever going away.

    And as much as we wish we could, we can’t ignore our student loans.

    One way or the other, we have to get rid of them.

    And when we do get rid of them for good, there might not be a better personal finance feeling in the world. Personally, I’ll never forget the day I made my last payment and shared the news with my future wife and family.

    To help you have that same feeling of accomplishment, here are my top 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professionals.

    Top 10 Student Loan Tips for Lawyers and Professionals

    1. Locate all your loans.
    2. Sign up for automatic payments.
    3. Do not miss a payment.
    4. Consider using Debt Snowball or Debt Avalanche.
    5. Make an extra monthly payment.
    6. Create a BAT that generates fuel for your student loans.
    7. Make more money and use that money for your loans.
    8. Take a tax deduction and use your tax refund for your loans.
    9. Consider a loan consolidation.
    10. Look for ongoing scholarship opportunities.

    1. Locate all your loans.

    As a first step, be sure that you are aware of all of your loans. Most people end up needing both federal loans and private loans, which are not tracked by the same loan servicers.

    Additionally, you may have taken out different types of loans at different stages of your education. It’s not uncommon to forget about some of those loans.

    Before you can implement a thoughtful strategy to pay back your loans, you need to ensure that all of your loans are accounted for.

    The best place to locate all of your loans is on your credit report. The next best option is to ask your school’s financial aid office.

    A credit report is a document that tracks your history of repayment and the current status of any loans you’ve taken out.

    You are entitled to receive a free copy of your credit report from each of the three main credit reporting agencies every year. To do so, simply visit annualcreditreport.com.

    For federal loans, you can also check online at studentaid.gov. But, your private loans won’t be tracked by the federal government at studentaid.gov.

    Besides checking your credit report, you can access all your private loan information from your loan servicer.

    Once you’ve identified all your loans, you can implement a strategy to pay them off efficiently.

    2. Sign up for automatic payments.

    By signing up for auto pay, you can save .25% interest on your federal loans. Many private loan companies also offer a .25% discount for using auto pay.

    Over time, those savings will add up. And, there’s really no downside to you.

    In fact, you should be using automatic payments even if your loan servicer does not offer a discount.

    When it comes to paying back loans or achieving any other financial goal, automating your money is a very good idea. In The Automatic Millionaire, David Bach thoughtfully explains how the single step of automating your finances can help you achieve all of your financial goals.

    You can learn more about Bach’s philosophy on his website.

    I personally implement many of Bach’s strategies in my own life. I used to automate my student loans payments. Now, I automate my mortgage payments. 

    The Automatic Millionaire is definitely worth a read.

    3. Do not miss a loan payment.

    You know that expression, “Act now, apologize later”?

    That absolutely does NOT apply to loan payments.

    No matter how responsible or well-intentioned you are, sometimes life happens. Whether it’s technically your fault or not, a missed loan payment is a big problem.

    It may seem unfair, but even a single missed payment can severely impact your credit history and credit score.

    Pieces of wood with message fair and unfair on wooden background illustrating one of the 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professionals is to not miss a payment.

    Because the consequences of a missed payment are so severe, this is another reason why setting up auto payments is such a good idea.

    If you know ahead of time that you won’t be able to make a payment, it is imperative that you notify your loan servicer ahead of time. Your loan servicer may be able to work with you and figure out a solution before major consequences set in.

    4. Consider using Debt Snowball or Debt Avalanche to pay off your student loans.

    When you apply the Debt Snowball strategy, the idea is to focus on the loan with the smallest balance first, regardless of interest rate.

    Once you have paid off the first loan in full, you move to the loan with the next smallest balance, again regardless of interest rate. The money you had been paying to the first loan can now be rolled into the second loan.

    When you apply the Debt Avalanche strategy, the idea is to prioritize the loan with the highest interest rate, regardless of the balance.

    Once you’ve paid off the loan with the highest interest rate, you move to the loan with the next highest interest rate. Just as before, the money you had been paying to the first loan can now be applied to the second loan.

    Either approach works perfectly for paying off multiple student loan balances. Regardless of which method you choose, always pay the minimum required amount on all loans every month.

    For more on the pros and cons of each method, check out our deep dive on Debt Snowball v. Debt Avalanche.

    5. Make an extra monthly payment for massive savings.

    You may be surprised how big of an impact even a small additional payment each month can have on your loans.

    Let’s look at an example.

    Let’s say you owe $100,000 in student loans and currently pay back $1,250 per month with an 8% interest rate.

    Using calculator.net, you learn that at this pace, it will take you 9 years and 7 months to pay off your loans. You’ll pay back a total of $143,377.94.

    Student loan calculator illustration showing the power of one additional monthly payment as part of Think and Talk Money's 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professionals.

    Now, let’s imagine you are able to pay back an additional $100 per month.

    Look what happens:

    Student loan calculator showing the power of one additional $100 monthly payment as part of Think and Talk Money's 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professionals.

    You can eliminate your loans an entire year sooner and save $5,040.13 in interest payments. Just with an extra $100 per month!

    What about if you are able to pay back an extra $250 per month?

    This is when I start to get excited.

    Check this out:

    Student loan illustration showing the power of an additional $250 monthly payment as part of Think and Talk Money's 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professionals.

    For just $250 per month, you can knock off 2 years and 2 months of loan repayments and save $10,684.35 in interest!

    Think about how good it will feel to get 2 years and 2 months of your life back without loan payments.

    How are you supposed to come up with an extra $100, $250, or more per month?

    I’m glad you asked.

    6. Create a Budget After Thinking that generates fuel for your student loans.

    If you want to pay off your student loans faster, you really only have two options.

    The first option is to create a Budget After Thinking that prioritizes loan repayment. One of the key purposes of budgeting is to generate fuel for your future goals, including eliminating student loan debt.

    Instead of letting your hard-earned dollars disappear, put them to good use. Even $100 a month can make a big difference, as we just saw.

    If you’re having a hard time generating additional fuel for your student loans, check out my 10 Tips to Win the Budget Game.

    So, the first option to pay off your loans faster is to create a budget and spend less money elsewhere.

    What’s the second option?

    7. Make more money and put those extra earnings directly to your loans.

    If you’re not going to cut spending in favor of student loan repayment, then your only other option is to make more money.

    That might mean getting a valuable side hustle. Or, it might mean earning a raise or a bonus at your primary job.

    Whatever the case may be, as you make more money, focus on improving your savings rate.

    Financial bills and adhesive note with text - Side hustle showing one of the 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professionals is to get a side hustle.

    Your savings rate is simply the amount of money you save each month divided by the amount of money you make.

    Even though it’s called “savings rate,” there’s no reason why you can’t include debt repayment in your calculations. Whether you are adding money to a savings account or eliminating debt, your net worth improves.

    It all counts in my book.

    The point is that when you start to earn more money, put that money to good use.

    Instead of shopping at more expensive stores or eating at fancier restaurants, keep your spending habits the same. Put those higher earnings towards your important life goals, like eliminating student loan debt.

    8. Take a tax deduction and use your tax refund for your loans.

    The IRS permits borrowers, up to certain income limits, to take a federal tax deduction up to $2,500 per year for student loan interest payments. That means that you can reduce your taxable income by up to $2,500 per year based on the interest you paid that year.

    The actual amount of money you’ll save with this tax deduction depends on variables like your tax bracket. Check with your accountant or tax professional for specifics.

    Regardless, as we’ve seen above, even a small amount of extra money can go a long way if used for additional student loan debt payments.

    In the same vein, what if you made it a goal to apply your entire tax refund to your student loan debt?

    Let’s return briefly to our example above.

    This time, let’s assume that each year, you receive a tax refund of $1,700. Instead of wasting that $1,700 annually on things you don’t care about, you decide to put that money directly towards your student loans.

    Look what happens when you apply that $1,700 tax refund to your student loans each year, without making any additional payments whatsoever:

    Student loan illustration showing the power of an annual $1,700 payment as part of Think and Talk Money's 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professionals.

    With just that one decision to use your annual tax refund for student loan payments, you knock off 1 year and 4 months of payments and save $6,099.26!

    That seems like a great use of money that you’ll never miss anyways.

    9. Consider a loan consolidation.

    Consolidating your various loans into a single loan can help make your life easier and save you money.

    Your life should get easier when you only have to track and pay one loan back each month. There’s also a much smaller chance that you forget to make a payment or lose track of a loan altogether.

    Besides the convenience, when you consolidate, you should receive an overall lower interest rate. That means long-term savings.

    Before you consider a loan consolidation, be sure to do your homework. One major consideration is that you will lose whatever federal loan benefits you currently have if you consolidate, such as the possibility for loan forgiveness.

    10. If you’re still in school, look for ongoing scholarship opportunities.

    This is something that didn’t occur to me until my final year of law school. It took me that long to realize that schools regularly offer scholarships, stipends, and grants to current students, not just prospective students.

    During my third year of law school, I applied for a scholarship and was awarded $2,000. I didn’t think of it at the time, but looking back, I could have used that $2,000 to prepay my student loan interest.

    That would have accelerated my progress towards eliminating my loans while I was still in school.

    This is a good time to point out that personal finance requires consistent attention. You don’t have to think and talk about money every day. Not even I want to do that.

    But, you do have to intentionally make your personal finances a regular part of your life.

    Let’s revisit our example once more.

    Sorry, I can’t help myself.

    What if you combined some of the 10 tips we just talked about?

    Let’s say you decide to make an extra $250 monthly payment, contribute your $1,700 tax refund annually, and make a one-time payment of $2,000 for a scholarship you earned while finishing up school.

    Let’s take one more look at calculator.net:

    With just three relatively painless decisions, you can knock off 3 years and 1 month of student loan payments! And, you’ll save $15,481.76!

    Think about what you could do with an extra 3 years and 1 month of your life without student loan payments.

    You can now use that $1,500 per month you had been using for student loans on other goals. Not to mention what you could do with your annual tax refund.

    On top of that, think about what you could do with that $15,481.76 you saved in interest payments.

    Decisions like these are how financial freedom happens.

    That’s powerful stuff.

    What are your favorite student loan repayment strategies?

    To recap my top 10 student loan tips for lawyers and professions:

    1. Locate all your loans.
    2. Sign up for automatic payments.
    3. Do not miss a payment.
    4. Consider using Debt Snowball or Debt Avalanche.
    5. Make an extra monthly payment.
    6. Create a BAT that generates fuel for your student loans.
    7. Make more money and use that money for your loans.
    8. Take a tax deduction and use your tax refund for your loans.
    9. Consider a loan consolidation.
    10. Look for ongoing scholarship opportunities.
    • Have you applied any of these strategies?
    • What am I leaving out that has worked for you?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • The Time is Now: Student Loan Basics

    The Time is Now: Student Loan Basics

    Have you noticed all the attention on student loans lately?

    To say there is some confusion and uncertainty would be an understatement.

    I don’t have any better idea than you do about what may happen in the student loan landscape.

    No matter what happens, the way I see it, you have two options .

    The first option is to do nothing, get angry, and blame everyone else.

    The second option is to take ownership, get prepared, and educate yourself about the student loan system so you’re ready for whatever comes next.

    If you’ve chosen the second option, you’re in the right place. That means you’re determined to not let outside factors you can’t control hinder your progress towards financial freedom.

    In this post, we’ll cover the basics about federal and private student loans so you can begin to make informed decisions to most efficiently eliminate your student loan debt.

    Whether you are finishing up school or currently paying off loans, this is a good place to start. No matter how the student loan landscape changes, it’s a fair bet that these basic concepts will remain in place.

    In the end, paying off student loan debt is really not that different from paying off any other form of debt. However before we start playing the game of conquering student loan debt, we need to understand some key ground rules.

    Let’s dive in.

    Student loan debt is a major obstacle to reaching financial freedom.

    Student loan debt is one of the major obstacles for people striving for financial freedom. That makes sense given that more than 42 million people in the United States currently have student loan debt.

    It’s not just about the number of people who have student loan debt. It’s the dollar amount of those loan balances. In my opinion, I don’t see how someone can be truly financially free when burdened by student loan debt.

    This is especially true for professionals with advanced degrees. According to the Education Data Initiative:

    • The average person with a graduate degree owes up to $102,790 in federal student loan debt.
    • 54.0% of all graduate school students have federal student loan debt.
    • 55.2% of people with master’s degrees have federal student loan debt.
    • 74.8% of people with professional doctorates have federal student loan debt.
    • 76.2% of doctors have student loan debt.

    It’s because so many of us rely on student loans to pay for school that there is no shortage of information available online. The problem is there’s so much information, it’s hard to know where to start.

    Let me help you get started.

    Federal loans are better than private loans.

    The first thing to know about student loans is that there are two entirely different types: federal loans and private loans.

    Federal loans are funded by the United States government. You can access the main federal student loan website at studentaid.gov.

    Private loans are funded by lenders, like banks. Some of the most popular private student loan companies are SoFi, College Ave, and Sallie Mae.

    When you hear about student loans in the news, you’re hearing about changes to the federal loan system. There may be some side effects for the private loan system, but the federal system is getting all the attention right now.

    There’s no real dispute that federal loans have long been a better option for borrowers than private loans. Federal loans almost always offer the best rates and terms. Even the private loan companies admit as much.

    The reason people have both federal and private loans is because federal loan amounts are capped. Once you’ve taken out all the federal loans you are eligible for, private loans become necessary to fill whatever funding gap remains.

    With tuition costs rising for college and grad school, it’s likely you’ll leave school with both federal and private loans.

    Understanding the available options and differences for each type of loan will help you eliminate your student loan debt as efficiently as possible.

    What to Know about Federal Student Loans

    Even with a changing landscape, below are the key aspects to keep in mind regarding federal loans.

    With this background in mind, you’ll be better equipped to make adjustments to your student loan payoff strategy should that time come.

    graduates holding piggy banks saving concept illustrating taking responsibility for student loan repayment on the way to financial freedom.

    There are 3 main types of federal student loans.

    There are three main types of federal student loans: Direct Subsidized Loans, Direct Unsubsidized Loans, and Direct PLUS Loans.

    Direct Subsidized Loans offer the best rates and terms and are designed for undergraduate students with financial need.

    The main advantage of subsidized loans is that the federal government pays the interest for the borrower for a certain period of time, like when the borrower is still in school. That could be major savings.

    Direct Unsubsidized Loans are available for undergraduate and graduate students and are not restricted to students with financial need. However, the borrower is responsible for all the interest on the loan.

    Your school determines which type of loan you are eligible for. Keep in mind there is cap to the amount you can borrow for each type of loan. We’ll discuss the caps in a moment.

    Your credit score does not factor into Direct Subsidized or Unsubsidized Loans.

    Unlike with private loans, Direct loans do not depend on your credit score. This is a key advantage of federal loans for people who have no credit history or poor credit history.

    Direct PLUS Loans are available for parents and graduate students.

    Direct PLUS Loans are for eligible parents and graduate and professional students.

    The other main differences with PLUS loans relate to the amount you can borrow and the interest rate you’ll pay, as seen below.

    Also, with PLUS loans, the borrower’s credit history is a factor considered during the application process. These loans are not available to people with poor credit.

    Federal Loans are capped depending on the loan type and education level.

    The amount you can borrow in federal loans depends on the loan type and education level (undergraduate or graduate/professional).

    With these caps in mind (besides PLUS loans), you can see how federal loans alone are usually insufficient to cover the full costs of higher education.

    Federal loans offer the best interest rates and lowest fees.

    As mentioned above, federal loans have long offered the best interest rates and lowest fees.

    Rates are always subject to change. For illustration purposes, here are the current interest rates for federal loans:

    Loan TypeLevelInterest Rate
    Direct Subsidized and UnsubsidizedUndergraduate6.53%
    Direct UnsubsidizedGraduate/Professional8.08%
    Direct PLUSParents or Graduate/Professional9.08%

    In addition to interest, most federal loans also include loan fees. These fees are taken out of the loan at the time the loan is first disbursed. That means the amount you’re borrowing and responsible for paying back is more than the amount you actually receive.

    Loan fees for Direct Subsidized and Unsubsidized loans is currently set at 1.057%.

    Loan fees for PLUS loans is currently set at 4.228%.

    As you can see, even within federal loans, the interest rate and fees charged vary depending on the type of loan and level of education.

    The federal government contracts with loan servicers to manage your loans.

    The federal government will assign your loan to a loan servicer to handle billing and other services. When you need information or have questions about your federal loans, you’ll need to contact your loan servicer.

    The federal government currently works with the following loan servicers:

    Keep your loan servicer’s contact information close by, especially these days.

    Your first federal loan payment is typically due six months after leaving school.

    With federal loans, you will usually have a six month grace period after you leave school before your first loan payment is due.

    Not all federal loans have a grace period, and interest usually will accrue during the grace period. You are allowed to pay this accrued interest before you enter repayment.

    The federal government offers a number of loan repayment plans, for now.

    The federal government offers a number of loan repayment plans.

    At least, for now.

    It’s anyone’s guess if these repayment plans will continue to exist and who may be impacted.

    For up-to-date information on the available repayment plans, please visit studentaid.gov or contact your loan servicer.

    So, what is a loan repayment plan?

    Generally speaking, a standard repayment plan means paying your loans back in equal monthly payments spread over ten years.

    In addition to the standard repayment plans, there are a number of plans currently available to reduce your monthly payment and extend your repayment term. These plans are typically based off of income level.

    The idea behind most of these repayment plans is to help you pay back your loans while still affording your other monthly expenses.

    Your loan servicer will work with you to determine the best repayment plan for your situation.

    With federal loans, there should be no prepayment penalty if you accelerate your loan payments on your way to financial freedom.

    One important note: regardless of the repayment plan you choose, you are still responsible to pay back the entire loan. If you choose a plan that offers lower monthly payments spread over a longer time period, you will end up paying more in total interest.

    Loan Deferment, Forbearance, Forgiveness and Discharge

    With federal loans, you typically have better options when you are struggling to repay your loans. Note that just because you may have more options does not mean you’ll be let off the hook.

    Loan forgiveness may be available to people who work in eligible public service jobs who make loan payments for ten years.

    Again, this may be all in flux.

    For up-to-date information on the available repayment plans, please visit studentaid.gov or contact your loan servicer.

    What to Know about Private Student Loans.

    With a basic understanding of federal loans as context, it’s not too difficult to understand how private loans work.

    The key here is that when it comes to private loans, there are more variables to consider. Lenders may have different rates, loan terms, and repayment schedules.

    Be aware that private loans likely will not offer loan forgiveness and may involve additional fees and potential penalties.

    The best thing you can do is to compare the various options for private student loans. A good place to start is with three of the most common private lenders:

    Each of these lenders provides detailed information on its websites. Even if you don’t choose any of these lenders, you can still do your homework on their websites.

    Besides just the interest rate on a potential loan, pay attention to other important factors like:

    • Loan fees
    • Repayment options
    • When the first loan payment is due
    • Prepayment penalties
    • Consolidation options and fees
    • Quality of service and responsiveness

    In the end, you’ll likely find that most private loan lenders offer comparable rates and terms. They are competing with each other for your business, after all.

    Where are you in your student loan journey?

    Ultimately, only you are responsible for your loans. You can blame everyone else for the changing landscape or you can educate yourself and make a plan.

    Whether you are finishing up school or currently paying off loans, this post is intended to provide student loan basics that should hold true no matter how the student landscape changes.

    Now that you understand the basic ground rules, you can work on a plan to pay off your loans as efficiently as possible on your way to financial freedom.

    Where are you in your student loan journey?

    Do you know anyone who would benefit from taking about student loan basics?

  • Good Credit Card Perks Besides Points

    Good Credit Card Perks Besides Points

    We recently discussed 10 credit card tips so you can benefit from credit card reward points without suffering from the penalties.

    Today, we’ll look at one of the other major benefits to using credit cards: the ability to easily track your monthly spending.

    This one perk can make staying on budget and fueling your Later Money bucket that much easier each month.

    When you consistently fuel your Later Money bucket, you’re moving closer and closer to financial freedom.

    Let’s take a closer look at how you can use credit cards as part of a healthy financial life.

    How to use credit cards to track your spending.

    Tracking your spending is a crucial first step in the budgeting process. But, that doesn’t mean that anybody actually likes doing it.

    The good news is that once you have created a Budget After Thinking and developed consistent habits, you no longer need to track every penny.

    Instead, you can track two simple numbers to stay on budget.

    Credit cards make it very easy to track these two numbers.

    Here’s exactly how I use credit cards to track my spending.

    When I get my monthly statement for each credit card, the first thing I do I add the amount and due date to my Notes app.

    I’ve been doing this for years now, which means I have a clear understanding of my family’s usual spending habits.

    I can then quickly assess whether it was a good spending month. For example, if I normally spend $4,000 per month on my card, and this month I spent $5,000, I’ll know very quickly that something is off.

    Sometimes, it’s obvious why I overspent. Maybe it was something like buying airplane tickets for a family vacation. If that’s the case, I don’t need to study my credit card statement too closely because I already know why my spending was more than usual.

    Other times, it’s not so obvious. When I don’t immediately understand why my spending was higher than normal, I take a closer look at my statement.

    In just a few minutes, I can look at an entire month’s worth of spending to determine where my money went so I can make thoughtful adjustments during the next month.

    This is how I stay on budget with two simple numbers.

    This same process also helps me track that month’s savings transfers to make sure I maintain a strong savings rate.

    Why I also track the payment due date in Notes.

    The reason I write the payment due date is to make sure I never miss a payment. This is the most important rule of responsible credit card use.

    If you miss even one payment on a single credit card, that missed payment will appear on your credit report. Your credit score will also drop.

    As a landlord, I play close attention to any potential tenant’s credit history and score. I am not willing to risk entering in a financial relationship with someone who has a history of missed payments.

    We recently received an application from someone who has missed 8 of her last 25 payments on her auto loan. That was a major red flag.

    I automate some, but not all, of my monthly payments.

    While we automate most of our monthly payments and transfers, we don’t automate all of them.

    Even though my wife and I only use two credit cards for our personal spending, we have business credit cards for our real estate properties.

    We also have mortgages and HELOCs that need to get paid at various times each month. I use the Notes function to remind me when these payments are due.

    For each credit account, I have automatic payments set up to pay the minimum required amount each month. I then pay the full balance each month manually.

    That’s because we have various sources of income that come in sporadically throughout the month. It’s simpler for me to pay certain bills manually instead of automatically.

    When you have multiple income streams, you have Parachute Money. Currently, our Parachute Money includes:

    • My primary job as a mesothelioma attorney
    • My wife’s primary job as an attorney
    • Rental Property 1
    • Rental Property 2
    • Rental Property 3
    • Rental Property 4
    • Law School Professor
    • Emergency Savings

    Using the Notes function helps me make the required payments each month after these income streams hit my checking account.

    What other benefits do credit cards offer?

    Credit cards offer a variety of other benefits to entice customers. Besides tracking your spending, two of my favorite perks are purchase protection and credit score monitoring.

    Purchase Protection and Fraudulent Charges

    Purchase protection is so important in today’s world. The last thing any of us needs is for our personal finances to get wrecked by scam purchases or fraudulent charges.

    Let’s say you buy something with Zelle, debit card, or cash. There are very little, if any, protections to get your money back if that transaction needs to be cancelled.

    Credit cards help prevent against fraudulent transfers, which is one of the best benefits to using credit cards besides reward points.

    Credit cards, on the other hand, typically offer the best purchase protection available. If you’ve been scammed or deceived in any way, your best bet at fixing that issue is to work with your credit card company.

    Also, credit card companies are generally very proactive and helpful in addressing fraudulent charges. If you do encounter any fraudulent charges, your credit card company will work with you to fix the problem.

    While credit card companies are pretty good these days at spotting fraudulent charges, I like to double check my online account to protect myself. To make sure I have not been targeted, I take about 30 seconds to look at my credit card transactions each week.

    Credit Score Monitoring

    Most credit card companies today offer free credit score monitoring through one of the major credit agencies, like Experian. You can see your credit score right in your online account.

    Your credit score will automatically update, usually once per month. You can see how your score changes from month to month and what factors currently influence your score.

    This is a very nice perk, as long as you don’t obsess over your credit score.

    How can I see all the benefits my credit card offers?

    Because there are so many credit card options on the market, the best thing to do is look up the card you have or are thinking about applying for.

    I prefer to visit websites like thepointsguy.com for thorough breakdowns and even valuations on each card’s offerings. This makes it easy to compare credit cards from different banks.

    You can also visit the credit card company’s website directly to learn the full extent of the benefits offered by each card.

    I use the Chase Sapphire Reserve and Chase Freedom Unlimited. Each card has a detailed webpage that details all of the benefits offered with the card.

    My favorite credit card benefit is still the ability to easily track your spending.

    Even with all these other benefits, my favorite credit card benefit is still the ability to easily track your spending.

    I’ve found this to be the easiest way to ensure I’m staying on budget and hitting my financial freedom goals.

    Do you use your credit cards to track your spending?

    What are your favorite benefits to using credit cards, other than reward points?

  • Money on My Mind: Global Happiness

    Money on My Mind: Global Happiness

    This week, we discuss recent reports on global happiness and starting families.

    We also discuss lessons from successful businesses that we can apply to our personal lives.

    The World Happiness Report 2025

    Since 2012, an organization known as The World Happiness Report (WHR) has studied global wellbeing and how to improve it.

    Each year, they analyze data from 140 countries and publish their findings in an effort to give everyone the knowledge to create more happiness for themselves and others.

    That sounds like a great mission to me.

    They also publish a global happiness ranking of all the countries studied. The rankings are based on answers to a single question:

    Please imagine a ladder with steps numbered from 0 at the bottom to 10 at the top. The top of the ladder represents the best possible life for you and the bottom of the ladder represents the worst possible life for you. On which step of the ladder would you say you personally feel you stand at this time?

    WHR explains that this “life evaluation” question empowers people to make their own judgments about what matters most.

    As part of its analysis, WHR uses economic modeling to explain countries’ average life evaluation scores. They look at six variables, and one of them jump out at me:

    “Freedom to make life choices.”

    What countries would you guess scored the highest on the 2025 rankings?

    The top five countries in the happiness rankings are:

    1. Finland
    2. Denmark
    3. Iceland
    4. Sweden
    5. Netherlands

    Each of these nations has ranked near the top for a long time.

    Where is the United States on the happiness chart?

    The United States fell to number 24, its lowest happiness ranking ever.

    The United States’ highest ranking was 11th place way back in 2011.

    I’m not totally surprised that the United States’ ranking is as low as it’s ever been.

    We’ve discussed some theories that may help explain this drop:

    I wasn’t surprised to see the United States rank 24th in the global happiness rankings, but I was shocked by the sub-ranking for this specific question:

    Are you satisfied or dissatisfied with your freedom to choose what you do with your life?

    The United States ranked 115th out of 147 countries in response to the freedom question!

    That ranking truly shocked me.

    It also helps explain one of the primary goals of Think and Talk Money: to help each of us reach financial freedom.

    When we are financially free, we can choose to live life on our own terms. To me, that sounds a lot like what the WHR freedom question is trying to answer.

    When you have financial freedom, you can make important decisions based on what truly matters. When you don’t have financial freedom, you risk making unsatisfactory decisions for money reasons.

    We can choose to spend more time with the people who are meaningful to us.

    We can choose to use our skills for work that is meaningful to us.

    Group of happy friends posing for a selfie on a spring day as they party together outdoors because they understand happiness is tied to financial freedom.

    Most of us grow up thinking that life only revolves around getting an education and then getting a job. We don’t allow ourselves to believe that financial freedom is possible for us.

    This was exactly how I felt before I wrote down my Tiara Goals one day on the beach in 2017.

    My goal with Think and Talk Money is to help us all realize that financial independence is within our reach. If we can think and talk about our money choices even a little bit every week, we can make sure our money life remains in balance with the rest of our life.

    By practicing strong personal finance habits, each of us can feel more satisfied with our freedom to choose what to do with our lives.

    How would you rank yourself on the freedom question?

    Are you satisfied with your freedom to choose what you do with your life?

    What are your core values?

    Have you ever written down your core values?

    Do you know what you’re striving for?

    Successful businesses look at these questions regularly. I find it helpful to learn how successful businesses operate so I can apply similar principles to my own life.

    For example, there’s a great business book called Traction by Gino Wickman. In the book, Wickman encourages businesses to focus on vision, mission, and values.

    It seems like a pretty good idea for all of us to think about vision, mission, and values as they apply to our own lives.

    For example, if you’re one of the nearly half of Americans not taking your PTO, are you making that choice based on your core values?

    It’s possible that you are. Perhaps you’re being strategic and have formulated a plan to benefit from all those extra hours at the office.

    Or, it’s possible that you’ve never really stopped to think about why you’re working so much. You’ve never paused to articulate to yourself what you want out of life.

    In Traction, Wickman makes a compelling argument why businesses should not skip this crucial step.

    We all should take the same step in our personal lives. In 2017, I wrote down my core values, what I call my Tiara Goals.

    Looking at the big picture, my Tiara Goals have helped me visualize what I truly want out of life.

    In the short term, my Tiara Goals help guide me through difficult decisions. As long as I’m clear with myself about what I want in the long run, I can make daily decisions to get my closer to those goals.

    Millennials want more kids but can’t afford them.

    According to a recent report from Business Insider, Millennials want more kids but can’t afford them.

    This makes me sad.

    The study points to rising costs, as well as the reality that Millennials are saddled with large amounts of student loan debt.

    Combined, it makes sense that Millennials are worried about money.

    If you want to start a family, or grow your family, what better motivation could there be to spend a little bit of time each week thinking and talking about money.

    If this is your reality, or you know someone in this position, establishing strong personal finance habits is crucial.

    Each week at Think and Talk Money, we focus on developing these strong personal finance habits.

    Please share Think and Talk Money with your friends and loved ones.

    I hope that in spreading the word about Think and Talk Money, we can all help each other make big life decisions without worrying about money.

    This is important whether you are hoping to start a family or have other life goals in mind.

    We can all benefit from making intentional and informed decisions with our money.

  • Why Credit Reports are So Important

    Why Credit Reports are So Important

    I first learned about credit when I was in law school. My teacher wasn’t a professor, though.

    My teacher was a surprisingly pleasant debt collector.

    I spoke to this debt collector after breaking my wrist snowboarding.

    For the second time in a year.

    Let me explain.

    About six months earlier, my friends and I took a road trip to go snowboarding in Wisconsin. I had never been to this location before and wanted to explore the entire ski area. After a few loops on the main run, I found my way to the terrain park.

    My plan was to scout out the terrain park and report back to my friends. I must have forgotten the plan as I approached a jump that I had no business approaching. That turned out to be a mistake.

    Heading towards the jump, I had too much speed and, for lack of a better word, panicked. My friend reported afterwards that as soon as I jumped, my body and snowboard turned parallel to the ground like I was lying in bed.

    After all these years, It almost seems peaceful to picture myself lazily flying through the air on a beautiful, blue sky, sunny day.

    Almost.

    To state the obvious, this was not a good position to be in since I needed my feet and snowboard to hit the ground first and land safely.

    I ended up landing on my backside with my hand and wrist hitting the ground first. The unpleasant result was a trip to the emergency room and a broken wrist.

    My reputation for having fragile wrists was secured.

    OK, back to the debt collector.

    A few weeks after returning to Chicago, I received a bill in the mail from the emergency room for approximately $200.

    I didn’t understand why I was receiving a bill since I had insurance and provided that information to the emergency room. I figured it must have been a mistake to send me a bill, and that my insurance company would pay for it.

    So, I crumbled up the bill and threw it in the trash.

    Healthcare and medicine. Medical and technology. Doctor working on digital tablet on hospital background illustrating how I first learned about the importance of credit history.

    Before you shake your head, remember that I was still in school and on my parents’ insurance. This was my first interaction with a medical provider where the bills came to me instead of them.

    I didn’t know at the time that even with insurance, I could potentially be responsible for some portion of the bill.

    For the next few months, I continued to receive bills from the emergency room. And, I continued to throw these bills straight in the trash.

    At some point, I received a new type of letter in the mail. This one caught my attention. It was from a collections agency.

    The letter said something to the effect of, “Call us immediately to dispute or pay this medical bill before we are forced to take action against you.”

    The scare tactic worked.

    I picked up the phone and had a surprisingly nice conversation with the debt collector. The debt collector explained how the collections process works and the potential impact failing to pay would have on my credit report.

    Credit report?

    Never heard of that before. Don’t think I have one.

    After hanging up the phone, I did some research and realized the debt collector wasn’t scamming me.

    I certainly did have a credit history, as reflected in my credit report, that I needed to be mindful of.

    I wrote a check to pay the bill the next day.

    This is how a broken wrist and a debt collector first taught me about credit reports.

    What is a credit report?

    As we learned in our post on using credit the right way, credit refers to an agreement to borrow money with the obligation to repay that money later, usually with interest.

    Credit also refers to a person’s trustworthiness or history of repayment.

    A credit report is a document that tracks that history of repayment, as well as the current status of any loans you’ve taken out.

    Your credit report will typically include:

    • Personal information (name, social security number, current and former addresses)
    • Credit accounts (current and historical accounts, including credit cards and any other loans)
    • Collection items (missed payments, loans sent to collections)
    • Public records (liens, foreclosures, bankruptcies)
    • Inquiries (when you apply for a new loan)

    Every time you open a loan, like a credit card, auto loan, or mortgage, it will appear on your credit report. Likewise, whenever you make a payment or miss a payment, that information will be reflected on your credit report.

    When someone has “good credit,” it means they have a reliable history of repayment. When someone has “bad credit,” it means they have not previously demonstrated a reliable history of repayment.

    Remember this key point: your credit report represents a complete picture of your interactions with credit over an extended period of time. Your credit report will include information about you going back years and years.

    This means that the information reflected on the report will follow you for the long term. Any negative information on your credit report will typically stay on your credit report for 7-10 years, depending on the credit reporting agency.

    What is a credit reporting agency?

    In the United States, there are three credit reporting agencies:

    • Equifax
    • Experian
    • TransUnion

    By law, you are entitled to receive a free copy of your credit report from each credit reporting agency every year.

    To do so, simply visit annualcreditreport.com.

    If you haven’t obtained your credit report recently, I highly encourage you to do so.

    Regularly checking your credit report is the best way to make sure that nobody has fraudulently opened any accounts using your social security number. It’s also the best way to monitor all the loans you are currently responsible for.

    Believe it or not, it’s not uncommon for people to forget about loans they have previously opened.

    Did you ever go to a Cubs game in college and sign up for a credit card just to receive a free XXL white t-shirt with a blue W on it?

    No?

    Uhh… me neither.

    How about signing up for a new credit card while making a purchase at your favorite store to save a whopping 10% that day?

    You may never end up using these credit cards and completely forget that you opened them. They’ll still appear on your credit report, and you are still responsible for those credit cards.

    Is a credit report different from a credit score?

    Yes, credit reports and credit scores are different.

    We’ll soon discuss credit scores in detail. For now, understand that a credit score is a number calculated based on your credit history that represents your present day creditworthiness.

    Your credit score captures a moment in time. That means it will change over time, sometimes quickly and dramatically.

    Unlike a credit score, your credit report does not change quickly. Like we mentioned earlier, any negative information on your credit report will typically stay on your credit report for 7-10 years.

    Why does my credit report matter?

    We typically rely on our ability to borrow money to make our biggest purchases in life. When you take out a mortgage or finance a car purchase, you are relying on your ability to borrow money to make that purchase.

    In these scenarios, lenders will “pull your credit” or do a “credit check” before agreeing to give you a loan.

    If you have a history of responsibly borrowing money and paying it back on time, a lender is more likely to lend you money.

    On the other hand, if you have a history of falling behind on payments, a lender may choose to not lend you money.

    Or, a lender may agree to give you a loan and charge you a higher interest rate to compensate for the increased risk. This could end up costing you lots of money.

    Poor credit history can lead to lost opportunities.

    Besides just financial consequences, a poor credit history can also lead to lost opportunities.

    As an example, it’s common practice for landlords to check an applicant’s credit history before renting them an apartment. Most major rental property search websites, like Zillow and Apartments.com, offer credit checks as part of the standard application process. My wife and I require a minimum credit score for all potential tenants.

    It makes sense why a landlord would pull an applicant’s credit. When you rent an apartment, you are signing a contract (a lease) to pay a predetermined about in exchange for a place to live.

    Landlords rely on those rent payments to pay for the property’s mortgage and upkeep. These rent payments can also directly impact the landlord’s livelihood.

    It should be no surprise that landlords are hesitant to rent apartments to people who have a poor track record of paying for things.

    Just as a landlord is sizing up your ability to pay the rent each month, other lenders, like a car dealership or mortgage lender, are sizing up the likelihood you can repay its loan.

    Don’t ignore your credit history.

    Have you checked your credit report this year?

    My wife and I check our reports at least once per year to make sure there are no red flags.

    Fortunately, I realized my mistake with the debt collector before that red flag ended up on my credit report.

    If I hadn’t, I would have seen that negative mark on my credit report for 7-10 years. This would have severely impacted my ability to qualify for mortgages and grow my real estate portfolio.

    I’m glad I learned that lesson about credit reports.

    I’m also glad that I haven’t been back to a terrain park since law school.

  • Good Credit with Unicorn Cake

    Good Credit with Unicorn Cake

    Something can be good and bad at the same time.

    I’ll give you an example. This weekend, we hosted a birthday party for my five-year-old daughter. She wanted a rainbow unicorn theme.

    When asked what she wanted for a present, she would unhelpfully respond, “No clue.”

    OK, great.

    Fortunately, the local toy store was stocked with rainbow unicorn items: puzzles, books, stuffed animals, craft kits, etc. The kids at school must be on the same page with their interest in rainbow unicorns this year.

    The rainbow unicorn party went well. We started with pizza, decorated cupcakes, and had a unicorn egg hunt.

    The highlight of the party?

    The birthday cake.

    We ordered a rainbow unicorn cake from one of the most popular bakeries in Chicago, Sweet Mandy B’s. The next time you’re in Chicago, do yourself a favor and pop in for a cupcake or cookie.

    After singing “Happy Birthday,” I started cutting pieces of cake for the kids. A few jumbo pieces of cake later, one of our guests came to my rescue and showed me how to cut smaller, kid-appropriate pieces.

    It’s a good thing she did because with the way I was cutting the cake, we were going to run out before all the adults got a piece. And that would have been a bad thing.

    See, this cake was incredible. I’m not always a cake guy (unless it’s ice cream cake), but this one was special.

    Vanilla confetti cake with buttercream frosting. It had the perfect balance of cake and filling. Sweet, but not too sweet. Soft and also firm.

    It wasn’t just me. I never saw a cake disappear so fast. Usually, we end up with so much cake leftover that I’m sneaking bites every time I open the fridge for the next week. Not this time. Sadly.

    By the end of the party, we had barely a single piece left (which was devoured within 24 hours).

    Half eaten cake on a plate symbolizing too much of a good thing like using too much credit can lead to debt which would be a bad thing

    There is a bright side to finishing the cake, though.

    If I had an unlimited supply of this cake, I’m not sure I could stop myself from eating it. The temptation would be too strong to sneak back to the fridge all day long, fork in hand. One little bite at a time.

    It’ll be fine.

    What does birthday cake have to do with personal finance?

    You know where this is going.

    Eating a wonderful cake at a birthday party is a good thing.

    Eating cake every day for the next week, no matter how good it is, would be a bad thing.

    You see? Something can be good and bad at the same time.

    And that leads us to our next major topic in the blog: the responsible use of credit.

    What is credit?

    Credit refers to an agreement to borrow money with the obligation to repay that money later, usually with interest. In this context, think of “credit” as another way of saying “debt.” When you use credit, you’re taking on debt.

    Credit also refers to a person’s trustworthiness or history of repayment. When someone has “good credit,” it means they have a reliable history of repayment.

    It’s important to always remember that credit and debt go hand-in-hand. That’s why before we discuss how credit can help us, we learned scary stats about debt. We discussed three big reasons why we’re in debt. And, in a preview to our conversation on credit, we learned the difference between Good Debt and Bad Debt.

    We typically rely on credit for big purchases.

    We typically rely on our ability to borrow money, or our credit, to make our biggest purchases in life. When you take out a mortgage or finance a car purchase, you are relying on your ability to borrow money to make that purchase. That ability to borrow money is known as credit.

    If you have a history of responsibly borrowing money and paying it back on time, a lender is more likely to lend you money.

    On the other hand, if you have a history of falling behind on payments, a lender may choose to not lend you money. Or, a lender may charge you higher interest rates to compensate for their increased risk.

    This could end up costing you lots of money.

    Poor credit will cost you more than just money.

    Besides just financial consequences, a poor credit history can also lead to lost opportunities.

    As an example, it’s common practice for landlords to check an applicant’s credit history before renting them an apartment. It should be no surprise that landlords are hesitant to rent apartments to people who have a poor track record of paying for things.

    These reasons, and other reasons we’ll soon discuss, illustrate why it’s so important to responsibly use credit.

    In our initial series on credit, we’ll discuss:

    • The basics of credit reports and credit scores and why they each matter.
    • How the responsible use of credit cards can fit into our personal finances.
    • What you need to know to maximize the benefits of credit card reward programs.
    • How to use other forms of credit, like a Home Equity Line of Credit (HELOC), to accelerate your progress towards financial freedom.

    By understanding what credit is and how your credit history is tracked, you’ll gain the confidence to use credit responsibly as part of a healthy financial life.

    I am in favor of the responsible use of credit.

    As I previewed in our discussion on Good Debt, I’m in favor of people responsibly using credit as part of a healthy financial life.

    That applies to our every day choices, like using credit cards to track our spending. It also applies to other forms of credit, like Home Equity Lines of Credit (HELOCs), to acquire assets. We’ll discuss these and other benefits of responsibly using credit in our upcoming posts.

    The important caveat, however, is that like the Sweet Mandy B’s birthday cake, we have to know when a good thing can become a bad thing.

    If we abuse the privilege of credit, the consequences can be severe. I abused the privilege of credit cards at the beginning of my career, and it took years to dig out of the hole.

    By understanding how credit works and how your credit is tracked, I hope you can avoid falling into a similar mess.

    I want you to happily enjoy the cake without the potential negative consequences.

  • Powerful Money Lessons from Alone

    Powerful Money Lessons from Alone

    One of my favorite shows is Alone.

    I’ve been talking about it a lot lately with anyone willing, or in the case of my students, with anyone without a choice but to listen.

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    How the TV show Alone can teach us about personal finance #thinkandtalkmoney #personalfinance #alonetvshow #alone #outbackmike @Outback Mike

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    If you haven’t seen it, the show is a competition between 10 survival experts who are dropped off in the middle of nowhere, completely isolated from all human contact. Each person is allowed to bring ten survival items, some clothes, and a safety kit. They all have cameras to film their journeys. Whoever survives the longest wins $500,000.

    It is astonishing what these people are capable of. They build their own shelters and catch all their own food. On a daily basis, they’re forced to solve problems. They have no one to help them, or to blame, but themselves.

    My favorite competitor is an Australian guy named Outback Mike. I was blown away by the ideas he came up with and the things he built. There was no mental or physical challenge that he backed down from.

    My wife and I first discovered Alone during the pandemic. It was the perfect show during that time of immense mental and physical hardship. There was something about the way each survivalist focused on that day’s tasks, and blocked everything else out, that resonated with us.

    Watching the latest season of Alone these past few weeks, it occurred to me that the show is full of analogies for the personal finance topics we discuss in the blog.

    I’ve found analogies to be great teaching tools, so here we go.

    1. Not all calories are created equal.

    The major challenge in Alone is getting enough calories to survive. Food is not exactly plentiful in the remote locations where the competitors are dropped off.

    To survive, competitors dedicate endless hours strategizing and looking for food. Common strategies include fishing, trapping, hunting, and foraging.

    One of the first things you learn is that not all calories are created equal. Calories from fat and protein are at a real premium. Even with an unlimited supply of berries and greens, the competitors make clear that you cannot survive for long periods without fat and protein.

    Besides the importance of the type of calories, the way the calories are procured is just as critical.

    This makes perfect sense in a survival scenario. If you expend 2,000 calories of energy to catch a fish, and that fish only provides you 1,000 calories of food, that is a losing proposition. If you continue on that trajectory long enough, you’ll starve to death.

    This is why contestants on the show always think about ways to passively procure food, such as setting traps or using gill nets. If they can obtain food passively, they can then use that time to rest (save calories) or on other necessary tasks.

    In the show, most competitors eventually tap out, on the brink of starvation, having failed to obtain enough food. It’s never for a lack of effort. It’s just really hard.

    So what do calories have to do with personal finance?

    Just as not all calories procured are created equal, not all dollars earned are created equal.

    This begs the question:

    If you think about what you do to earn money, are you the contestant trading 2,000 calories of energy for 1,000 calories of food?

    In other words, are you always working?

    landscape photo of man fishing on river near mountain alps symbolizing that not all dollars are created equal as discussed on Think and Talk Money.

    Let’s look at two hypothetical professionals.

    The first professional works 80 hours per week and earns an annual salary of $200,000.

    The second professional works 40 hours per week and earns an annual salary of $120,000.

    Which one would you rather be?

    Would your answer change if we convert the annual salary to an hourly rate?

    On an hourly rate, the first professional ends up earning $48 per hour.

    The second professional earns $58 per hour.

    If you’re still leaning towards the first professional who earns more overall but less per hour, did you think about how valuable that extra 40 hours per week could be?

    That’s time that could be spent on your true passions. It’s time that could be spent with friends and family. That’s time that could also be spent developing a skill or earning income through a side hustle.

    Looking at it another way, what if you could earn the same $200,000 without having to work 80 hours per week? This is where passive income streams come in.

    Like the gill net that catches fish without the active involvement of the fisherman, have you explored ways to make money while freeing up your time for other worthwhile pursuits? This is an unavoidable step on your way to financial freedom.

    For what it’s worth, I’m confident that the survival experts would all choose to be the person who makes more money per hour while also having more time available for other pursuits.

    2. Attitude is everything.

    Watching Alone, you see a wide range of personalities. While each contestant has the resume of a survival expert, one attribute always separates the winners from the losers: attitude.

    The contestants are forced into what would be impossible survival scenarios for the average person. It’s completely understandable to have tense, frustrating, and stressful moments.

    This isn’t me judging the contestants who have poor attitudes. I wouldn’t last an hour in the woods by myself. I’ve never even been camping. My wife caught more fish when she was six than I’ve caught in my whole life.

    This is just my observation that most of the time, contestants have similar survival skills. What separates the winners is their attitude and ability to recognize that things will go wrong.

    When things go wrong, they don’t blame anyone else or play the victim.

    Instead of getting frustrated and quitting, they think of solutions to the problem at hand. This is what so impressed me with Outback Mike.

    Yes, we all need a bit of luck in life to thrive. But, we need to put ourselves in position to benefit from luck when it comes our way. That takes intentional thought and effort.

    I’m guessing we all know very smart and talented people that have bad attitudes. When things don’t go their way, they immediately blame other people. Nothing is ever their fault. They feel entitled to success without doing the work.

    That type of person usually doesn’t lead a very happy or fulfilling life.

    For sure, that person would not last a week on Alone.

    3. Along with starvation, missing family is the hardest part.

    If it’s not starvation, odds are contestants will tap out because they miss their families. The physical challenges of being forced to survive on limited food in rugged conditions is hard enough.

    To do it alone and isolated from your family makes it nearly impossible.

    One of the most enlightening parts of the show is when the contestants reveal their mental struggles to the camera. Since they’re alone, and typically starving, we get to see raw emotion in real time. You learn a lot about the human condition in these moments.

    One unavoidable truth is that us humans are social creatures.

    We need our people. We need love and support and connection. Going through life alone goes against our DNA.

    Even the chance at winning more money than the contestants ever dreamed of is not nearly enough to keep them away from their families any longer.

    This is why I want to encourage you to not isolate yourself with your money decisions. Money touches all aspects of our lives. Don’t try to go it alone. Include your people in your money life. Talk to them. You will only be better for it.

    There’s one other lesson Alone teaches us about the importance of family. A lesson that is extremely relevant to me right now.

    When each season begins and the new contestants are introduced, my wife and I know right away who isn’t going to make it: the people with young kids.

    These people have all the skills necessary to survive. But, those skills don’t matter when they start missing their kids. The emotion is too strong. The longing to be with their kids overcomes all else. They simply do not want to miss another day of their kids’ lives.

    I think about this lesson in the context of our daily lives. Like the professional in our example above working 80 hours per week, at what sacrifice do all those hours come? How many hours away from home is that? How much time away from our kids?

    When I think about those questions, I again think about what I would do with my time if I was financially free.

    I think about my Tiara Goals.

    Have you watched Alone?

    Do you agree with my observations?

    Let us know in the comments below!

  • My Path to Financial Freedom with Tiara Goals

    My Path to Financial Freedom with Tiara Goals

    A few months before we got married, my wife and I took a trip down to Florida. One afternoon, I headed out to the beach with a book, a notebook, and a few ice cold beverages.

    The weather was perfect. It was sunny but not too hot. Blue skies and just a slight breeze. The beach was quiet that afternoon. I set up my chair to face the ocean and started reading. This little break was exactly what I needed in the middle of “wedding planning.”

    @thinkandtalkmoney

    What I would do with financial freedom 👊🏼 #thinkandtalkmoney #financialfreedom #personalfinance #tiaragoals #realestateinvesting

    ♬ original sound – Thinkandtalkmoney

    I don’t recall the book I was reading that day. I’ve been meaning to look back at my journals to see if I can figure it out. Anyways, I’ll never forget what I learned about myself that afternoon.

    The author wrote about the power of financial freedom. We’ve discussed financial freedom in previous posts. The basic idea is that when you are financially free, you can choose how to live your life on your own terms. You can make important decisions based on what truly matters to you, as opposed to being forced down a certain path for money reasons.

    On the beach that day, the concept of financial freedom was not new to me. I had read about it for years. The concept really hit home that afternoon when the author asked a simple but powerful question:

    What would you do with financial freedom?

    Maybe the question really resonated with me because I was about to get married. It’s only natural to daydream about what life would be like after the wedding, even though my wife and I had been a couple for six years by that point.

    Over the years, we had talked a lot about what we wanted our lives together to look like. We knew long before the wedding how we each felt about major topics like starting a family and where we wanted to live.

    We were also on the same page when it came to money decisions. My wife and I met early on during my personal finance journey, not long after I had determined to get my money life sorted out. My wife still jokes that she was my first personal finance student.

    By the time we got married, I had been on my personal finance journey for about seven years. I was out of debt and was starting to think about the options that were now available to me. It was around this time that I learned one of the most powerful words in personal finance:

    DINK

    Back then, my wife and I were both working as lawyers in Chicago. We didn’t have any kids. I didn’t realize it until later on, but we were DINKs.

    DINK means “Dual Income No Kids.”

    When you’re in a relationship where you have two incomes coming in and are sharing financial responsibilities, you have the opportunity to supercharge your Later Money goals.

    If you are currently a DINK, or will soon be a DINK, please pay extra attention here.

    Don’t waste this powerful opportunity to supercharge your Later Money goals.

    This is what my wife and I were able to do, even if we didn’t know what a DINK was. We each had good incomes coming in and our monthly expenses were low. The two of us could comfortably share an apartment, instead of each paying for an apartment separately. That’s major savings each month.

    We didn’t have to worry about childcare. We were young so the odds of unexpected medical care were lower. All things considered, it was pretty easy to keep our Now Money to a minimum with plenty to spare for Life Money.

    This allowed us to fuel our Later Money goals, like having a nice wedding and saving up for a home or rental property. We had money in the bank and seemingly endless choices.

    And, I didn’t want to screw it up.

    Which brings us back to me sitting on the beach, thinking about what I would do with financial freedom, with maybe 1 or 2 less beverages in the cooler.

    What did I really want out of life?

    I put my book down and looked off into the ocean, thinking about what I wanted out of life. I started thinking about what my ideal life would look like. By this point, I was engaged in the type of deep thought where you don’t even realize what’s happening around you.

    It quickly occurred to me that I had never truly thought about what I wanted in life. Sure, I had thought about things like having a family and being able to take vacations.

    But, I never carved out time to purposefully think hard about what I actually wanted. I had never asked myself what truly motivates me.

    Without a doubt, I had never written down the answer to that powerful question: what would I do with financial freedom?

    I hadn’t ever allowed myself to dream about financial freedom.

    The truth is, I don’t think I had ever visualized a life that wasn’t dominated by a full-time job. Up to that point, my whole life had revolved around getting an education and then getting a job. I never pictured a world where I might not need a full-time job to provide for myself and eventually my family.

    I had read about the concept of being financially free, but it always seemed like a possibility for other people, not me. Writing this years later, I feel sad for that version of myself for having such limiting beliefs.

    That said, I completely understand why I felt that financial freedom was unattainable for someone like me. This was in the phase of my life where I had been preoccupied with eliminating debt. Because of that debt, I didn’t allow myself to dream about what life could look like if money wasn’t holding me back.

    This was also before my wife and I had rental properties. It was before we recognized the impact of side hustles and multiple streams of income. I had read about and understood these concepts in theory, but I hadn’t put what I learned into practice.

    That day on the beach, it was like a light went on in my head.

    After years of patience and discipline, I had climbed out of debt. I was now a DINK with Later Money in the bank waiting to be deployed. That meant I had created opportunities.

    I wasn’t financially free, but for the first time in my life, I allowed myself to accept that financial freedom was possible for me.

    This was one of the most powerful moments in my life.

    With that realization in my mind, I walked into the ocean to cool off and think some more.

    What would I do with financial freedom?

    There in the ocean, I wasn’t thinking about dollars or career goals. This was more important than that. I was thinking about what I wanted my life to look like if money was not an issue. I was thinking about what I would do with my time if I was in complete control.

    Floating there in the water, it was like I had an epiphany. Everything suddenly became clear to me. I ran out of the ocean to get back to my chair before I forgot what just popped into my head.

    I whipped out my top bound spiral notebook and started writing with a blue pen. Minutes later, I had written down seven answers to the question: what would I do with financial freedom?

    My “Tiara Goals” were born.

    Nearly eight years later, I still have that sheet of notebook paper. I keep it safe in a leather binder protected by a laminated page holder. It has those familiar tear marks on the top of the page where the paper connected to the spiral binding.

    Even though I have these seven goals memorized by now, I still look at this sheet of paper every month. Looking at this sheet is an incredible reminder of that day on the beach when everything became clear to me.

    A quick aside, I call my goals “Tiara Goals” because it’s a silly, but meaningful, description to me. Have some fun with what you name your goals. If you do it right, you’ll be thinking and talking about these goals a lot.

    What are my Tiara Goals?

    So, here are my original Tiara Goals from 2017, as scribbled on that sheet of paper and edited for clarity:

    1. Be with my wife and kids as much as I want. Dad never missed a game. Mom never missed a game. Nana never missed a game.
    2. Not be forced to commute to work on Friday or Tuesday or whatever day, if I need that day for myself.
    3. Choose how to spend my working hours (representing clients, teaching, volunteering, building a business, etc.).
    4. Continue to study and learn constantly.
    5. Take at least one big trip every year.
    6. Never turn down an exciting or smart opportunity because I can’t afford it.
    7. Work alongside people that value my contributions.

    Keep in mind that I wrote these goals before I had kids and before I was even married. This was also years before the pandemic when working from home was a foreign concept to most of us.

    I think it says a lot that I was thinking about these things way back then.

    Travelers couple look at the mountain lake. Adventure and travel in the mountains region in the Austria after thinking about what to do with financial freedom.

    In a future post, we’ll unpack each of these goals.

    While I haven’t reached financial freedom yet, I think I’m doing a pretty good job already living by these fundamental values.

    How do my Tiara Goals help me today?

    My Tiara Goals motivate me to continue striving for financial freedom. We’ve talked extensively about the importance of having strong money motivation in our lives. When we have these powerful motivations, we can stay on budget, get out of debt, and fuel our Later Money goals.

    We can obtain Parachute Money. We can choose to do meaningful work and choose to spend more time with people who are meaningful to us.

    No, it’s not easy to achieve financial freedom. But, it is a whole lot easier when you know what you are striving for in the first place.

    That’s why at the beginning of my financial wellness class, I ask my students to write down their own versions of Tiara Goals. I want to help them avoid the limiting beliefs that I had before that day on the beach.

    My favorite part of class is when my students share their Tiara Goals.

    Without a doubt, this is always my favorite part of class. When I say I’m on a mission to convince you that talking money is not taboo, I think of my students sharing their goals. I get so energized by hearing their goals. My students report the same sentiment after learning what drives their friends and peers.

    Over the years, my students have shared countless impactful stories. As unique as these goals can be, it’s remarkable how most of us want the same things in life. Year after year, I hear the same motivating forces:

    • Spend more time with my family.
    • Travel and enjoy experiences around the world.
    • Stay healthy and fit.
    • Provide for my children and my aging parents.
    • Work for a cause I believe in.
    • Have time to volunteer.

    I also regularly hear one thing that my students, and the rest of us, don’t want:

    • I don’t want to be stressed about money.

    Isn’t it telling that year after year, most of us want the same things in life? I’ve yet to hear anyone say that they dream about working endless hours and not taking their PTO.

    Be specific, but not too specific, when you think about financial freedom.

    When we talk about what we do with financial freedom in class, I encourage my students to get specific without being so precise that the goal becomes restrictive. When we’re thinking about goals related to financial freedom, the idea is to focus more on big-picture, core values.

    There will be a time and a place to strategize how to get there. The point here is to help define what you’re even trying to get in the first place.

    For example, instead of “spending more time with family,” I would suggest something like, “never miss my child’s soccer game or dance recital because of work.”

    Instead of “travel around the world,” I would suggest “at least one overseas trip of at least 2 weeks per year.”

    Adding that little bit of specificity will help you visualize what you’re striving for with your money decisions.

    Don’t get discouraged if you think you are not close to financial freedom.

    Even when you feel like financial freedom is only a distant dream for you, it’s important to actively think about what you want out of life. I’d even suggest that the further away you feel from financial freedom, the more important it is to think about what it would mean for you.

    When you’re at your lowest point, visualizing what you would do with financial freedom is a helpful escape.

    If you haven’t ever actively thought about what you would do with financial freedom, hopefully this post will encourage you to do so.

    Don’t forget to write down whatever you come up with.

    I suggest you share your version of Tiara Goals with your friends and loved ones. It’s OK to keep some of your goals private. By sharing, you will get the benefit of them cheering you on. You’ll also hopefully encourage them to share their goals with you, which can be very inspiring.

    Have you thought about what you would do with financial freedom?

    Have you ever written it down or shared your answers with others?

    What are your Tiara Goals?

    Let us know in the comments below!

  • Big Decisions are Easier with Parachute Money

    Big Decisions are Easier with Parachute Money

    Pretend your life is like flying on an airplane.

    Maybe you feel like your airplane is a fighter jet, moving too fast to enjoy the ride. Maybe your airplane is a small regional carrier, boringly flying back and forth between the same two airports.

    For whatever reason, you decide you need to get off this airplane. You decide to take control and make a change. You’re ready to jump.

    All you need is a parachute.

    You have a choice between the only two parachutes on the plane.

    The first parachute has only one string (or line) connecting the canopy to the harness . You think to yourself, “This doesn’t seem very safe. What if that one string breaks? That would end very badly for me.”

    Then, you look at the second parachute. This parachute has 10 strings. You say to yourself, “OK, this one looks much safer. If one string breaks, the parachute still has nine other strings to keep me safe. Even if something goes wrong with one or two strings, I would glide safely to the ground.”

    It’s obvious which one of these parachutes to choose.

    This situation illustrates what I believe is one of the most empowering concepts in personal finance.

    It’s what I call “Parachute Money.”

    Before we move on to our next core personal finance topic, credit and debt, let’s take a few minutes to discuss this powerful money concept.

    What is Parachute Money?

    The central idea of Parachute Money is to create multiple sources of income so you are not beholden to any one source.

    Parachute Money includes your primary job, any side hustles, any income generating assets, and your emergency savings account. It also includes the income of your significant other, if you share finances.

    With Parachute Money, if one of your sources of income dries up, you are more than covered with your other sources.

    Picture each source of income as a string on your parachute. The more strings on the parachute, the stronger it is. Likewise, the more sources of income you have, the stronger your personal finances are.

    Note that multiple sources of income does not have to mean multiple jobs. Even with one job, you can still pursue additional, or stronger, parachute strings.

    Let’s say you earn a salary and also could earn commissions or bonuses. Each one of those income streams could be another string in your parachute.

    Or, you could prioritize boosting your emergency savings even more than you normally would. You might even consider a separate savings bucket called “Parachute Money.” Besides boosting your savings, you could also focus on passive income streams, like investing in dividend stocks.

    The central idea remains the same. Protect yourself with as many income sources as you can.

    Think of Parachute Money as a way to visualize financial independence.

    Think of Parachute Money as a way to visualize what financial independence really means.

    Parachute Money empowers you to confidently make big life changes. When you have Parachute Money, you are financially free to control your life, not the other way around.

    Parachute Money is all about your intentional decisions. It’s for when you’ve decided, on your terms, that you’re ready to make that big change in your life. You’re excited to take matters into your own hands, but you don’t want to disrupt your entire life in the process.

    To return to our airplane analogy, you could stay on the plane if you wanted. Nobody is forcing you to jump. But, you’re ready for something different. And when you do jump, you want a parachute that will help you land as safely as possible.

    That’s what Parachute Money can do for your life. It allows you to make that leap while landing gracefully.

    You could say it out loud like this, “I have Parachute Money. I am financially independent because I am not beholden to any single source of income. If one source of income goes away, because I’ve decided it’s time for a change, my other sources of income will protect me.”

    Parachute Money is more than just emergency savings.

    Parachute Money is more than just a bank account. We’ve talked about how an emergency savings account is the first savings account that everyone needs.

    An emergency savings account is part of your Parachute Money, but there’s more to it.

    Recall that an emergency savings account is what you turn to when life dictates your choices. If you unexpectedly lose your job or have a large bill to pay, emergency savings will keep you afloat. You didn’t choose for these things to happen, but you still need to be prepared.

    So, emergency savings are for protecting yourself and your family from the unexpected. Like we talked about above, Parachute Money is about you dictating the course of events, not the other away around.

    What are my current parachute strings?

    My wife and I have worked hard to create multiple sources of income. We currently have the following strings in our parachute, in no particular order:

    • My primary job as a mesothelioma attorney
    • My wife’s primary job as an attorney
    • Rental Property 1
    • Rental Property 2
    • Rental Property 3
    • Rental Property 4
    • Law School Professor
    • Emergency Savings

    Combined, these sources of money provide a solid parachute for us.

    If you wanted to, you can break out some of these sources of income into further parachute strings.

    For example, Rental Property 1 consists of 4 apartments. Each apartment could be a separate string. I teach multiple law school courses; each course could be another string. Like we talked about above, your job may include a salary, commissions, and bonuses. Each could be a separate parachute string.

    What are some situations where Parachute Money can make big decisions easier?

    Let’s look at three possible situations where Parachute Money can empower you to make the best choices for you and your family.

    1. It’s time for a new job.

    After working for the same company for 10 years, life around the office looks different.

    Your direct supervisor left for a new job. You were passed up to take her place. New policies are rolling out, including a requirement to be in the office five days per week.

    You feel stuck in place. You still like your job and most of the people you work with. And, you could hang around for the steady paycheck.

    Or, you can take control and make a change. If you have Parachute Money, you can take your time looking for a new job that matches your priorities. Maybe you decide not to go back to full-time work at all.

    2. It’s time to move.

    You live with a roommate and have another 10 months on your lease. Things have gotten uncomfortable.

    He doesn’t clean up after himself. He stays up late watching movies so loud you can’t sleep. He eats your favorite leftover Thai food you had saved for lunch the next day.

    You could “tough it out.” He’s still a good friend of yours.

    Or, you can take control and make a change. If you have Parachute Money, you can handle the costs of breaking the lease and finding a new apartment.

    3. It’s time to stop depending on your parents.

    You’re a full-grown adult and are still financially dependent on your parents.

    Sure, the money is nice to have.

    The problem is your parents have let it be known, in so many words, that they are to be consulted on how you spend their money.

    You may think you are choosing where to live or where to send your kids to school. Deep down? You know your parents will have the final word.

    Elderly father lends money to his adult son. He helps his child deal with financial problems. His son is hoping to not be dependent on his father anymore thanks to Parachute Money learned on Think and Talk Money.

    You can continue letting your parents dictate your life.

    Or, you can take control and make a change. If you have Parachute Money, you can tell your parents, “Thanks, but no thanks.”

    Parachute Money gives you control.

    These are just a few examples of how Parachute Money allows you to regain control of your life.

    Notice that in each situation, you’re not dealing with a sudden emergency. Instead, you’ve reached a tipping point and decided it was time for a change. Without Parachute Money, your options would be limited.

    In our example above about wanting a new job, Parachute Money allows you to make that leap. You may temporarily be without your primary source of income- that string on the parachute broke.

    But, you’ll be more than fine because you have other parachute strings to land you safely, like an emergency savings account, a side hustle as a ghost writer for a blog, and a rental property.

    Parachute Money is one of my favorite personal finance concepts.

    Parachute Money is one of my favorite concepts in personal finance. I first learned about the general idea from J L Collins in his renowned book on investing, The Simple Path to Wealth: Your road map to financial independence and a rich, free life.

    The Simple Path to Wealth is a must read for anyone wanting to learn the power of investing on your own through index funds.

    We’ll have plenty more to say about how Collins has influenced my own decisions in our investing series. I credit him for teaching me that investing does not have to be hard. It’s actually pretty simple if you follow his tips.

    To learn more from J L Collins, check out his website here.

    In his book and blog, Collins describes what he calls “F-You Money.” He tells the story of getting in a shouting match with his boss one day at work, shortly before walking away from that company. As Collins explains, nobody deserved an “F-You” more than that guy.

    In Collins’ example, he had enough money saved up where he could say those choice words to his boss. His “F-You Money” empowered him to live on his own terms.

    On your way to financial independence, don’t ignore Parachute Money.

    The reason I love the idea of Parachute Money is because it encapsulates so many of the money wellness habits and goals we’re striving for with Think and Talk Money.

    Parachute Money gives you flexibility and control. When you have multiple sources of money, you are not beholden to any one source.

    Think back to the image of the parachute with only one string. What happens if that one string breaks?

    Likewise, what happens if your only source of money no longer fits into your best life?

    As you think about these questions, picture yourself jumping out of the airplane.

    What parachute are you reaching for?

    Disclosure: This page contains affiliate links, meaning I receive a commission if you decide to purchase using my links, but at no additional cost to you. Please read my Disclosure for more information.

    © 2025 Matthew Adair

    Subscribe Here to Join our Newsletter!
    Name
  • Great Talk: Money, Friends and Cheeseburgers

    Great Talk: Money, Friends and Cheeseburgers

    Talking money is not taboo.

    The only thing that’s taboo is avoiding your personal finances.

    To help flip the script and convince you that talking money is not taboo, I plan to regularly post about the current money conversations that I’m having. Through my examples, I hope to encourage you to have similar conversations.

    In our first “Great Talk” post, we’ll discuss what my wife and I decided to do with our Later Money throughout 2025. We’ll also talk about how really smart people I know have started budgeting. We’ll conclude with an empowering conversation I had with a friend about what you can do with your time if money wasn’t an obstacle.

    What I’m doing with my Later Money in 2025.

    Later Money is what you are saving, investing, or using to pay off debt. This bucket includes long term goals and investments, like retirement and college savings. It also includes emergency savings, paying off debt, or any other shorter term goals, like saving for a wedding or a downpayment for a house.

    Later Money is the key category that fuels your ultimate life goals, like financial independence.

    The more you fuel this category, the faster you can reach your goals.

    So, what are my wife and I doing with our Later Money in 2025?

    We recently had a great talk about our options and came up with a plan that will guide us throughout the year. Before we talk about our 2025 goals, it’s important to keep in mind that your Later Money goals will change over time. That’s perfectly fine.

    Our goals in 2025 are not the same as they were between 2016 and 2024. Prior to 2025, my wife and I were focused on expanding our real estate portfolio.

    We purchased our first rental property in 2018, a four-flat in an up-and-coming Chicago neighborhood. Less than a year later, we bought a three-flat in the same neighborhood.

    In 2021, we invested in a Colorado rental ski condo. In 2022, we purchased our fourth rental property, a three-flat, in the same (now booming) neighborhood in Chicago.

    After living in our rental properties since 2018, we purchased a single-family home just outside Chicago in 2024.

    During this timeframe, any spare dollar we earned went towards acquiring more real estate. We contributed towards other financial goals, like retirement and college, but our priority was investing in real estate.

    Knowing when enough is enough.

    Our goals have changed in 2025. We started talking about revamping our goals towards the end of 2024. I owe a lot of credit for our new goals to Chad “Coach” Carson and his excellent book, Small and Mighty Real Estate Investor: How to Reach Financial Freedom with Fewer Rental Properties.

    In his book, Coach Carson makes a compelling argument to think about when enough is enough. His message was about acquiring more and more real estate, to no end, but also applies to any pursuit in life. You can learn more about Coach Carson and his incredible journey on his website.

    Reading Small and Mighty Real Estate Investor helped my wife and I conclude that at this point in our lives, we have enough. If anything, we’re closer to having too much on our plate. We self-manage our 10 units in Chicago and work closely with a property manager in Colorado. With our full-time jobs and kids at home, we’ve bitten off as much as we can chew.

    Our portfolio generates enough income to help fuel our current goals. If we were to continue expanding, the headaches could end up outweighing the financial benefits.

    We want to build a life full of experiences and memories. That means we need more time, not more money. Acquiring and managing more properties right now would take up a lot of time. That tradeoff is not currently worth it to us.

    So, if we’re not pursuing additional properties in 2025, what are our goals?

    After talking it through together and weighing all our options, my wife and I came up with these three goals for 2025:

    1. Our first goal is to continuing paying down our mortgage debt. We used HELOCs (Home Equity Line of Credit) to help us acquire some of our properties. Now that we’ve determined that “enough is enough,” we’re focused on paying back these loans.
    2. Our second goal is to build up our emergency savings. We mostly ignored our emergency savings between 2017 and 2024. It was risky and led to some touch-and-go moments that we’d like to avoid moving forward.
    3. Our third goal is to boost our contributions to our kids’ college savings accounts. We use what’s called a “529 college savings plan.” 529 plans are state-sponsored, tax-advantaged investment accounts. We use Illinois’ 529 plan because we receive a tax break as Illinois residents. Just about every state offers a 529 plan. They are a great way to save for college.

    With our plan in place ahead of time, we now know where every dollar is going before we earn it. This takes the anxiety out of trying to figure it out after the money has already hit our bank account.

    At the end of each month, all we need to do is make our Later Money transfers to each account. We can rest easy knowing that we’re making progress towards our personal finance goals.

    How Budgeting is Helping Very Smart People.

    One of my favorite moments since launching Think and Talk Money occurred just last week. Walking down the hall in my office, one of my colleagues called me over.

    She was very excited to share that she started tracking her spending so she can create a Budget After Thinking.

    We chatted for ten minutes. She’s been reading the blog on her commute to work every Monday, Wednesday, and Friday. She used Think and Talk Money vocabulary, like “Now Money” and “Life Money.”

    She showed me the app she’s been using to track her spending, one I wasn’t familiar with and am now looking into. The best part was that she’s been telling her friends about Think and Talk Money because she’s already learned so much.

    This is exactly why talking about money is not taboo. She taught me something new and helped me think about my own budgeting process. She gave me new ideas to think about.

    How could this type of conversation be bad?

    We didn’t need to talk numbers. We talked strategy and habits. That’s what talking money is all about.

    What would you do with your time if money was not an obstacle?

    I had lunch with an old friend last week at a downtown Chicago lunch spot that’s been serving up epic burgers since the 1970’s. My friend and I are both balancing careers as lawyers in Chicago with young families at home.

    In between bites of a massive BBQ-bacon-cheeseburger, I asked him a question I like asking smart people:

    “What would you do with your time if money wasn’t an obstacle?”

    Without hesitation, he answered that he would work with his hands. He likes working on projects around the house. He gets immediate satisfaction from completing a repair or making an improvement.

    Two men eating out in cafe or restaurant talking about financial independence as learned on Think and Talk Money.

    His answer was great and very relatable. My years as a landlord has taught me the same feeling of satisfaction in completing a project.

    What stood out to me the most was how quickly he answered the question. He knew exactly what he would do if money was not an obstacle.

    This simple question helps illustrate what I mean when we talk about financial independence. It’s not an easy goal to accomplish, but I can’t think of a better goal to strive for.

    You are financially independent when money is not an obstacle.

    When you are financially independent, you can spend more time doing what is meaningful to you.

    You can spend more time with people who are meaningful to you.

    Whether you want to work with your hands or represent clients or teach kids, the choice is yours when you’re financial independent.

    That seems like a goal worth striving for.

    What could ever be better than that?

    So, let me ask you:

    What would you do with your time if money was no obstacle?

    Please share below!

    And always remember, talking money is not taboo.

  • Protect Yourself With an Emergency Savings Account

    Protect Yourself With an Emergency Savings Account

    In our last post, we talked about the importance of fueling your savings and how savings differ from investments.

    Here, we’ll discuss how to best optimize your savings so you are protected in times of emergency and can achieve your short-term goals.

    We’ll also talk about whether you should automating your savings, and if it makes sense to start saving while you’re paying off debt.

    Let’s begin with the most important savings account we all need: an emergency savings account.

    The first savings account you need is an emergency savings account.

    The first savings account you need is commonly referred to as an emergency savings account. This is your ultimate security blanket for whatever life throws at you.

    For example, if you lose your source of income, your emergency savings will keep you afloat until you find a new source of income. The idea is to use your savings so you don’t have to pull from your long-term investments.

    Your emergency savings is not just for when you lose your job. Your emergency savings will also protect you in times of emergency (brilliant, huh?), like unexpected medical bills or expensive home repairs.

    The idea remains the same: instead of pulling from your investments, you will have cash available in your savings account to cover your needs.

    Aim for 3-6 months of Now Money saved for emergencies.

    Aim for building up 3-6 months of your Now Money saved in a dedicated emergency savings account.

    Why aim for saving enough Now Money instead of saving enough to cover your total Budget After Thinking?

    Because Now Money represents the consistent, reoccurring expenses that you need to pay every month to take care of yourself and your family. Since you will only be using this money in times of emergency, you can, and should, forego some of life’s luxuries until you get back on track.

    Man protected from the crisis because he has 3 to 6 months of emergency savings thanks to think and talk money.

    The same is true for fueling your Later Money goals. Take a pause until you sort out whatever it was that caused you to spend your emergency savings in the first place.

    Come on Matt, should I save 3 or 6 months of Now Money?

    It depends! Personal finance is personal.

    If you have no dependents, 3 months worth of savings is a good benchmark. In most circumstances, that should give you enough time to get back on your feet.

    If you have dependents, that means you are responsible for additional humans, sometimes tiny humans. These humans are counting on you for support. Targeting 6 months of savings is a good idea so you can continue to provide for them.

    You should also consider your source and consistency of income when deciding how much you’ll need saved for emergencies. If you are not paid regularly throughout the year, you should target a larger amount in your emergency savings to cover those longer gaps between pay.

    When you are part of a dual-income household, you may be able to get away with less emergency savings since two people are contributing to the monthly bills. If one of you suffers a sudden job loss, the other person’s income can still be used to keep the household afloat.

    One last thing: Building up to 3-6 months of emergency savings will take time. Don’t pressure yourself to accomplish this goal overnight. Each month, you can add to this account until you reach your target. Any and all progress is good progress.

    Do not rely on credit cards for emergencies.

    Unfortunately, many of us rely on credit cards to pay our bills. When we do this, our debt grows and cancels out any gains we’re making through our savings and investments.

    Just as you shouldn’t pull from your investments in times of emergency, you should not rely on credit cards to protect you.

    Savings is also for more fun, short-term goals.

    We just talked about the first savings account you need, an emergency savings account. I agree with you that thinking about emergency savings is not exactly fun. Job loss… medical treatment… car repairs. Yup, not fun.

    Let’s talk about more fun stuff. Savings is also for short-term goals, whatever those goals are for you. This is your Later Money in action fueling your life goals.

    Remember, we said emergency savings was your first account. Not your only account.

    Once you’ve identified your specific Later Money goals, it’s a good idea to create separate savings accounts, or buckets, for each goal. This will help you visualize the progress you’re making towards each goal. It will also help you not use your savings that was intended for one goal on something else.

    Happy wedding photography of bride and groom at wedding ceremony paid for with savings learned on Think and Talk Money

    What kind of savings buckets might you have? Before I got married, I had separate savings accounts for:

    • Engagement ring
    • Wedding
    • Down payment on a home
    • Travel
    • Cubs Season Tickets
    • Emergency Savings
    • Budget Busters

    I had a specific amount in mind for each category and would make transfers each month into those buckets. Not each account received an equal amount.

    For example, I knew how much I needed for Cubs tickets, usually payable at the end of the year, and divided that amount by 12 months.

    The amount needed to purchase something like an engagement ring was more… fluid.

    My students in recent years have suggested other savings buckets, as well. We’ve talked in class about saving for a car, saving for holiday presents, and saving for kids’ schooling.

    Whatever your savings goals are, using separate buckets will help you stay on track.

    Setting up separate savings accounts online is easy.

    It’s easy to set up separate savings accounts online with most major banks. Once you create your initial account, you can create sub-accounts that will appear on the same landing page as your primary account. Each account will have an individual account number, and you can label them however you like.

    When you do set up your savings accounts, it’s a good idea to have a different bank for your primary checking account and your savings accounts. This will help you resist the temptation to spend your savings. Out of sight, out of mind, and all that.

    I’ll soon have a post on my favorite online savings accounts. There are a number of them out there that offer good interest rates and a solid user experience.

    Automating your savings is a good idea, but I don’t personally automate.

    I automate a lot of my money tasks, like setting up automatic bill payment for every bill that comes to mind. This includes my mortgages. I also have automatic deductions taken from my paycheck for my 401k plan.

    Automating your money is a very good idea. In The Automatic Millionaire, David Bach explains how the single step of automating your finances can help you live rich and retire richer. You can learn more about Bach’s philosophy on his website.

    I don’t disagree with Bach and implement many of his strategies in my own life. The Automatic Millionaire is definitely worth a read.

    Still, I don’t automate my savings transfers.

    I automated my savings transfers in the past and learned that I prefer the emotional high of manually making savings transfers.

    Money is emotional. This is just one example.

    Happy young couple making savings transfer online in computer app and feeling an emotional high thanks to Think and Talk Money

    I like how it makes me feel to go into my checking account and transfer that month’s Later Money to my savings. It makes me feel good to see the pop up on my computer: “Your transfer is complete!”

    I like that feeling so much that I’m not worried about skipping a savings transfer. That moment gives me a lot of joy.

    Whether you choose to automate or manually transfer into your savings account, please make sure the dollars are not disappearing and are actually going towards your most important goals.

    If you have debt, should you still build up your emergency savings?

    During my money wellness class, I usually get a question like this:

    “Should I build up my savings while I’m paying off student loans or other debt?”

    My recommendation is different depending on the type of debt. That’s because interest rates are generally much lower for student loans or mortgages than for credit card debt.

    In a future post, we’ll talk about what is commonly referred to as “good debt” and “bad debt.” Student loans and mortgages, in my opinion, represent good debt. Credit card debt is almost universally considered bad debt.

    Typically, good debt has much lower interest rates than bad debt. You might be paying 20% or more on your credit cards and closer to 8% on your student loans (and probably even lower on your mortgage).

    If you have high interest credit card debt, pay that off first before you prioritize savings. It doesn’t make any sense to pay 20% interest to a credit card company just so you can earn 4% interest in a savings account.

    On the other hand, if you have student loan debt or mortgage debt, I recommend you start building your emergency savings account while you’re simultaneously paying down that debt.

    Yes, paying 8% interest is mathematically worse than earning 4% in savings account. If you are driven strictly by the math, you should pay off that 8% debt before you start saving in a 4% interest account.

    Never forget that money is emotional.

    But, money is emotional. I think it’s worth paying the interest on your good debt so you can experience your savings growing.

    Plus, if you do have an emergency that requires you to tap into your savings, you won’t have to rely on credit cards and pay the much higher penalty.

    Keep in mind that if you go this route, you still need to make your required debt payments. We are only talking about extra money that you have available that could go towards additional debt payments or to savings.

    The temptation to ignore your savings is real, especially when you have debt.

    The temptation will be there to pay off whatever debt you have as quickly as possible and forego saving altogether.

    I still feel this temptation every month. Should I contribute my next dollar to building up savings or paying down mortgages?

    For most of the past year, I was laser focused on paying down mortgage debt. More recently, I’ve reassessed and have been working to build up my savings.

    Having talked it over with my wife, we want to make sure we’re protected should something unexpected happen, even if that means temporarily slowing down our progress on our mortgages.

    This way, we won’t end up in a cycle of using credit cards to cover us in times of need.

    If you’re faced with a similar decision, know that you’re already ahead of the game by even thinking about how to use your Later Money to fuel your goals.

    Whether you are paying down debt or increasing your savings, you are heading in the right direction.

    Please drop a comment below if you have any additional tips to share!

    Do you prefer automatic savings or manual transfers?

    What are some of your favorite savings buckets you’ve used?

  • Why You Need to Fuel Your Savings

    Why You Need to Fuel Your Savings

    Would it surprise anyone to learn that most Americans are not satisfied with the amount they have saved?

    Let’s take look at some of the key findings in the recently published Yahoo Finance/Marist Poll 2025 National Survey on the State of Savings:

    • Only 10% of households are completely satisfied with the amount of money they have saved.
    • Only 20% reported saving more in 2024 than in 2023.

    These numbers are scary. You can read more here. The scariest part for me is that these results aren’t surprising at all. They closely mirror the stats I first showed my students back in 2021 when discussing savings.

    Why are these numbers so scary?

    In the abstract, I can understand why these stats may not seem too scary to you.

    Let’s look at another stat that illustrates what happens when we don’t have adequate savings:

    • About 33% of households would not be able to pay their bills or expenses for one month, if faced with a sudden loss of income.
    • This number rises to 38% of Gen Z and 41% of Millennials who report they could not pay their bills for even a month.

    What do these numbers mean?

    1 in 3 people currently reading this post, in the comfort of their homes they have worked so hard for, would not be able to afford those homes for even one month if they suddenly lost their jobs. It’s worse for Gen Z and Millennials.

    Maybe you’re on the train commuting to work while reading this. How many people are in the train car with you? 30 or so? Pick out 10 passengers, really look at their faces.

    Seats of a passenger car in a European train with 1 of 3 people sitting on it not able to pay their bills for one month if they lost their jobs.

    They’re just like you, typically good people, working a job to provide for themselves and their families. If these 10 people suddenly lost their jobs, they wouldn’t be able to pay their bills next month.

    Count me in the group of people not completely satisfied with their savings.

    If you read these stats and are honestly not worried about your savings, you are in the minority and are doing a tremendous job managing your personal finances.

    Keep up the good work and please let us know in the comments below what strategies are working for you.

    On the other hand, if you’re being honest with yourself, you’re most likely in the 90% of people that are not completely satisfied with their savings.

    Count me in this group.

    From 2017 to 2024, my wife and I prioritized using all of our available money to acquire real estate. The downside was limited funds available for savings.

    We now have work to do to build our savings back up. Instead of presently shopping for investment properties, we are now focused on paying down mortgage debt and increasing our savings.

    Most people attribute their low savings to rising cost of living.

    What is the most common explanation given by people that have so little saved? Rising cost of living across the nation:

    • Nearly 66% of Americans believe that the cost of living for the average family is not affordable in their area.

    Millennials and Gen X are the most worried about the cost of living, with more than 70% of each group feeling unprepared. 64% of Gen Z and 59% of Baby Boomers likewise feel unprepared.

    Cost of living includes necessary expenses like housing, food, transportation, and healthcare. In other words, Now Money.

    There are any number of reasons we can point to that are combining to drive up the cost of living, like limited housing inventory, higher interest rates, and more expensive groceries.

    Father and daughter buying apples in grocery store as part of rising cost of living nationally

    Whatever the reason for why costs are going up, I’m more interested in adapting and thriving in the current environment rather than making excuses.

    So, what exactly can we do to improve our savings?

    We can first eat Italian beef while working on our money mindset.

    Then, we can create a Budget After Thinking that fuels our goals.

    The next part, figuring out what to do with that money you generated for savings, is much easier. Before we talk about specific savings tips, let’s make sure we’re on the same page as to what we are trying to accomplish through saving.

    Savings are for short term protection and short term goals.

    When we talk about savings, what exactly are we talking about anyways?

    According to Merriam-Webster, saving means “the preservation from danger or destruction: deliverance.”

    Uhh, that’s intense.

    Scrolls down…

    Savings (pleural) means “the excess of income over consumption expenditures.” Much better.

    That’s about as simple as it gets. Savings is the money you have left over that you didn’t otherwise spend. In Think and Talk Money vocabulary, it’s your Later Money.

    In The Richest Man in Babylon, George Clason described savings with one of my favorite quotes in all of personal finance:

    “A part of all you earn is yours to keep.”

    Translation: you worked hard to earn that money. You should think about keeping some of it.

    Close up of baby girl wrapped in a security blanket symbolizing an emergency savings account learned on Think and Talk Money.

    Actively saving money to fuel your Later Money goals is a non-negotiable step towards financial independence.

    You can use your savings to protect yourself and your family in times of need. You can also use your savings for short-term goals, like paying for a wedding or a downpayment on a house.

    Think of it this way, your savings make it so all those hours you spend on the job- the time away from your family or your passions- was not for nothing.

    What is the difference between saving and investing?

    Keep in mind that savings is different from investments, although both count towards your Later Money.

    Savings is for (1) short term protection and (2) short term fuel for your life goals. Your savings is your security blanket for the here and now so you don’t have to take away from your wealth-generating investments at the wrong time.

    Keep this money in a dedicated savings account (or accounts) so the money is readily available when you need it.

    There is very little, if any risk, involved with saving money. That’s because reputable banks in most countries carry deposit insurance to protect your money. In the United States, deposits are protected up to $250,000 by The FDIC.

    So, how are savings different from investments?

    Investments are assets that you purchase with the goal of making a profit over time. That might be through the stock market, real estate, or any number of other options. Think of investing as the best way to supercharge your wealth over the long term.

    Investing is a major component of overall money wellness, but investing comes with risk. As the saying goes, “you don’t get something for nothing.”

    Because you can lose your money in any investment, it’s not a good idea to expect that money will immediately be there when you need it. That’s one reason why you should have savings distinct from your investments.

    One way to counteract investment risk is to invest for the long-term, so you don’t want to interrupt those investments for short-term goals. This is another reason why we need savings in the short term.

    One final point about saving vs. investing. There is a point when you will have enough saved in the bank that you can solely focus on growing your investments. This is a very comfortable place to be and where I am currently focused on returning.

    Saving is an essential part of overall money wellness.

    To recap, saving money to fuel our Later Money goals is crucial to overall money wellness. Sometimes, we’ll use our savings for protection, like in times of emergency. Other times, we’ll save with a clear goal in mind, like paying for a wedding or a house.

    Saving is not the same as investing, although both are important. The reason we save money, rather than invest it, is so that money is readily available when we need it.

    In our next post, we’ll discuss what to do with the money we are saving for maximum results. We’ll cover some key strategies for what to do with the money you have generated so your savings align with your overall money goals.

    Let me know in the comments below if you’re not completely satisfied with your savings, like me.

    Have you taken any steps to join the 10% of Americans who are completely satisfied?

  • Better at Making or Keeping Money?

    Better at Making or Keeping Money?

    When people learn that I’ve been teaching money wellness to law students, I usually get a reaction like, “I need that class! I know nothing about investments and the stock market.”

    It’s a fair reaction. Investing in the stock market can be complicated. Most of us never learn basic stock market principles, let alone how to manage an investment portfolio.

    It’s also a reaction that has always fascinated me. Yes, wanting to learn about investing is important. But, it’s not where money wellness begins.

    I often wonder, why do people automatically assume that money wellness means investing? There are so many things that we need to get right before we can focus on investing.

    Learning about the stock market wasn’t going to help me when I was struggling with debt. I needed to first figure out how to make better spending choices and get out of debt. I needed to play defense before I could go on offense.

    Yes, investing is important.

    No, it shouldn’t be the first thing we think of when we hear money wellness.

    We’ve hardly mentioned investing so far in this blog.

    Have you noticed that so far in the Think and Talk Money blog we have hardly even mentioned the word “invest”?

    That’s because in order to invest, we first need available money.

    To have available money, we need a budget that actually works.

    To have a budget that actually works, we need honest, powerful life goals.

    Are you starting to see why we first talk about money mindset? Then we moved on to budgeting?

    We will talk about investing once we have a plan to continuously generate money to invest.

    We will soon talk about investing. A lot. Don’t worry. In my money wellness class, we discuss in depth the importance of investing to create wealth.

    Here at Think and Talk Money, we will also talk extensively about investing, including in the stock market and in my preferred asset class, real estate.

    Investing is not as hard as generating money to invest.

    For now, our goal is to establish sound habits so we have real money to consistently invest over time. It doesn’t make sense to learn how to invest until we have a strong foundation in place.

    I think you’ll also find that investing is really not that hard. If learning how to do it on your own doesn’t sound like something you want to do, there are professionals that can do it for you. Whether it’s a good idea to go that route is something we’ll discuss so you can make an informed decision.

    If you do hire a professional to invest your money, you still need to know enough so you can talk to this person.

    Plus, this person will likely tell you that your ongoing mission is to generate more cash to fuel investments. That’s what we’re focusing on now.

    The fun part is once you’ve discovered your motivations and established strong habits, you will consistently have money available so you can invest month after month for the rest of your life.

    You could be a terrific investor. If you only have $1,000 to invest a single time, your upside will be limited. If you continuously generate $1,000/month of Later Money to invest, your options (and your wealth) will grow exponentially.

    My wife and I would not own five properties today if we didn’t first learn personal money wellness.

    My wife and I would not own five properties (11 rental units) today if we had not first learned money wellness fundamentals. I don’t just mean we wouldn’t have had money available to invest, although that is certainly true.

    I also mean we wouldn’t have the skills and knowledge to successfully run our real estate business. If you’ve ever wanted to be a business owner or investor, working on personal finance skills now is critical.

    Maybe that’s not your path. Still, these skills are critical whether you are a consultant, a writer, or a teacher. Would you agree that having money issues and stress at home can distract you from performing your job at the highest level?

    How many hours per year do you work to make money?

    Lately, when people ask me why I’m so passionate about money wellness, I respond with a question of my own that goes something like this:

    “Let’s say we work 2,000 hours per year to make money (40 hours per week, 50 weeks per year).

    We won’t even count all the hours we spend getting dressed and commuting to our jobs.

    We also will pretend we’re not looking at our emails in the evening and on weekends.

    We definitely won’t count the hours we’re staring at the ceiling fan because we can’t sleep.

    OK, so that’s 2,000 hours (plus) per year, to make money.

    How many hours per year do we think about what to do with that money?”

    Let that sink in for a moment.

    How many hours do you work every year to make money? 2,000? 3,000? I’m guessing a lot of those hours are stressful.

    Now, how many hours do you think about what to do with that money?

    Do you spend any hours at all talking about what to do with that money?

    This is why I am passionate about money wellness. Most people spend the vast majority of their lives worried about making money and practically no time at all thinking about what to do with that money.

    No, I’m not suggesting that you need to think about money for 2,000 hours per year.

    What I am suggesting is that even that little bit of time each week spent thinking and talking about money is just as important as the time you spent earning it.

    Think and Talk Money is about encouraging each other to make purposeful money choices.

    Robert Kiyosaki put it best in Rich Dad Poor Dad, “It’s not how much money you make. It’s how much money you keep.”

    If you knew someone that made $1,000,000 per year, and at the end of the year, had only invested $20,000, what would your reaction be?

    What if you knew someone who made $100,000 per year and invested $20,000? Did your reaction change?

    Multicultural group of women stacking hands together - Female community concept with different girls support each other - Girlfriends hugging outdoors encouraging each other to visit think and talk money.

    Think and Talk Money is all about actively thinking and talking about money so we can help each other make informed choices with our hard earned money.

    Whether you make a lot of money or a little money, it doesn’t matter. What you choose to do with that money is up to. It’s your life.

    All I want is for you to make those choices from a position of informed confidence.

    One response to “Better at Making or Keeping Money?”

    1. Kevin Avatar
      Kevin

      Great insight! The foundation is so important!

      Reply

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

  • How to Stay on Budget with Two Simple Numbers

    How to Stay on Budget with Two Simple Numbers

    Most of us humans are pretty good at avoiding things we don’t like. The things I’ve done to avoid mayonnaise…

    Budgeting falls into this category of avoidance. Even though most of us can appreciate that budgeting is a crucial step in money wellness, we still avoid it.

    Some of us give it a shot, and usually quit before we notice meaningful improvements. Just as problematic, some of us obsess over our budgets in an unhealthy and unsustainable way. This was me for a while. My obsession was mint.com.

    I didn’t have a healthy relationship with budgeting apps.

    If you used mint.com like I did before it ended, do you also have nightmares about those red tracking bars? Mint.com users know exactly what I mean. Overspend $11 on groceries? Red bar. One too many lunches downtown? Red bar! A last minute Saturday morning yoga class? RED! BAR!

    It still pains me to think about how many hours of my life I wasted trying to recategorize expenditures so those red bars would turn green. If I just move this box of cereal from Groceries to Social Life, that Groceries bar will turn green. Oh wait, now Social Life is red. OK, move those movie tickets to Car Repairs.

    When my wife was still courting me, I introduced her to mint.com. You might be thinking, “Matt, why on earth would you introduce her to something that drove you crazy!?” Valid question.

    She was a good sport and gave it a shot for a little while. Thankfully, she was smart enough to realize tracking every penny wasn’t for her. The whole thing gave her more anxiety about money. Think about that. The idea was to create a plan for her next dollar so she didn’t have to worry about money. All I did was make it worse by introducing her to a budgeting app.

    There’s an alternative to tracking every penny for the rest of your life.

    That experience paved the way for my preferred budgeting method that my wife and I still use today. We discussed this method briefly in our recent Q&A post.

    Please keep in mind this method is for people who have already created a Budget After Thinking and are honestly dedicated to creating fuel for their Later Money. Only when you get to that point will you no longer need to track every penny. At that point, your money motivations will be so strong that you’ll stay on track without needing to track every expenditure.

    If you’re not there yet, don’t worry. You will be soon. Follow my top ten budgeting strategies until good habits become second nature. Then, move on to this simple plan.

    Part 3: How to Win the Budget Game

    My preferred tracking method is a version of zero-based budgeting.

    Zero-based budgeting was first introduced in the 1970s by Peter Pyhrr. (I don’t love the name, either.) The main idea is that every dollar has a job, something we already talked about in our conversation about eliminating disappearing dollars.

    In my version of zero-based budgeting, you don’t need to track every penny. You don’t need budgeting apps or complicated spreadsheets.

    You’ll only need to focus on two numbers each month to know whether you are on track or falling behind. I’ll show you those two numbers below.

    Before you get too excited, I need to reiterate this key point: if you want to succeed with zero-based budgeting, you still need to first create a Budget After Thinking. Otherwise, you won’t be able to figure out the key two numbers that you need to focus on.

    This step is for those people who have already tracked their spending for at least three months, made thoughtful adjustments so their spending is in line with their values, and now know exactly how much fuel they can generate for their Later Money every month.

    OK, so how does this all work?

    I mentioned there are only two key numbers you’ll need to focus on each month:

    1. Your checking account cushion.
    2. Your Later Money transfer amount.

    Let’s explore each number.

    1. Your checking account cushion is your safety net.

    A checking account cushion is the amount of money in your checking account that you don’t plan to spend. The purpose of the cushion is to give you a little breathing room so you can pay your bills, even if you overspend in one month.

    Without the cushion, if you have a tough spending month, you either need to skip paying certain bills or skip making your Later Money transfer. Neither option is acceptable. The first option leads you into debt. The second option halts progress on your most important life goals.

    The checking account cushion gives you protection.

    How much of a checking account cushion do you need?

    How much of a cushion do you need? It depends on whether you have consistent income (regular paychecks), or are paid inconsistently (commissions, freelance, contract, etc.)

    If you are paid with consistent paychecks, I recommend your checking account cushion equal the amount you’ve planned to spend in your Now Money category from your Budget After Thinking (don’t worry, example below). This amount should give you a comfortable safety net without leaving too much money in your checking account that could be better used elsewhere.

    If your pay is inconsistent, you’ll need a larger cushion to cover the larger gaps between pay days. I recommend you have double the amount of your Now Money. Note, you may have to tweak this amount based on your unique situation.

    In our really lost boy example, he received paychecks biweekly. A good checking account cushion was $3,600 (equal to his Now Money).

    This means that there should be $3,600 in his checking account to start each month. At the end of the month, after paying all of his bills and making his Later Money transfers, he should still have $3,600 left in his checking account. That’s his checking account cushion.

    It’s OK if your checking account cushion temporarily dips below the amount you started the month with. This could happen during the time of the month when you pay certain bills, like your rent or mortgage. Don’t worry. The amount in your account will climb back up once you receive your next paycheck.

    A final point: don’t spend this cushion. Fight the temptation to use your checking account cushion to pay off bills or debt. Without that safety net, zero-based budgeting does not work.

    2. Your Later Money transfer is the main reason you’re budgeting in the first place.

    This number reflects the whole purpose of budgeting in the first place: to create fuel for your ultimate goals in life. If you don’t know what your goals are, revisit our conversation on why you should want to be good with money. It all starts with what you truly want from your life and how you can use your money to get it.

    When you’ve created your Budget After Thinking, you’ll know exactly what this amount is. In our really lost boy example, the total Later Money transfers added up to $2,050. In future posts, we will discuss where to transfer and what to do with this Later Money. No matter what, the goal is to put this money to work for you to progress towards your goals.

    By focusing on just these two numbers, (1) your checking account cushion and (2) your Later Money transfer amount, you don’t have to track every penny. You’ll know if you are hitting your goals or falling behind just by looking at these numbers.

    Now that we know the two key numbers to focus on, let’s see how this all works.

    How to ensure you are on track with your money goals with just two numbers.

    Sticking with our really lost boy, he predetermined that his checking account cushion is $3,600 and his Later Money transfer amount is $2,050.

    At the start of the month, that means he had $3,600 in his checking account. Throughout the month, his checking account balance increased when he got paid (our really lost boy earned $7,500 per month). His checking account balance decreased whenever he paid for things like rent ($2,200) and any other bills.

    The checking account cushion ensured that he had enough to cover all of his expenditures throughout the month. For example, if his rent was due on Wednesday, and he wasn’t getting paid until Friday, his checking account cushion ensured that he had enough in his account to pay the rent on time. His cushion might fall temporarily below $3,600, but his next paycheck would soon replenish his account.

    As the month went on, various bills came due. Utilities may be due on the 7th of the month. Credit card bills on the 15th. These payments can all be automated so he didn’t have to actively worry about them. Again, his checking account cushion guaranteed he had enough in his checking account to pay them.

    Towards the end of the month, in a perfect world, our really lost boy would have exactly $5,650 left after paying all of his bills. He could then transfer the predetermined $2,050 of Later Money to his various Later Money accounts. He’s then left with a checking account cushion of $3,600 and is ready to begin the next month.

    This is not a “set it and forget it” budgeting method.

    This is not a “set it and forget it” budgeting method. Think and Talk Money is all about exerting a little bit of mental energy on your money every week. This budgeting method is a good illustration of what that means. You don’t need to track every penny, but you still need to pay attention to your money choices.

    To help you with that, I suggest that you glance at your banking or credit cards apps once a week to monitor your spending. If you use credit cards or electronic payments for most expenditures, it is quick and simple.

    The reason it’s a good idea to glance at your banking apps is to make sure you are relatively close to your spending targets. If you notice that you’re overspending in the first half of the month, you can make the appropriate adjustments before the month ends.

    This small amount of effort throughout the month is worth it. Every time you make that Later Money transfer at the end of the month, you’ll feel exactly what I mean.

    Don’t strive for perfection.

    I said above “in a perfect world” to highlight that we’re not striving for perfection. That’s an impossible standard. One month, our really lost boy might have only had $3,300 left after making his Later Money transfer. That’s fine. It’s a temporary blip that he could easily fix, if he’s honestly dedicated to his life goals. He had a couple of options.

    His first option was to course correct the next month by spending $300 less. That could mean temporary adjustments in his Now Money or Life Money, such as skipping a couple dinners out, doing yoga at home, and buying chicken instead of steak at the grocery store.

    His second option was to replenish his checking account cushion from his specific budget busters savings account. What is that, you ask? It’s a separate savings account to cover you if you have one of these higher-spending months so you can keep your money plan progressing.

    In some months, you will actually underspend.

    Where do you get the funds for such an account? Believe it or not, in some months, your spending will come in under budget. Let’s say our really lost boy had one of these good spending months in January. Maybe he did Dry January and ate all his meals at home for health reasons to compensate for all the holiday celebrations.

    In this example, the result was he spent $500 less in January than he had budgeted for. Instead of leaving that $500 in his checking account (bringing his cushion up to $4,100) where it turns into disappearing dollars, he transferred it to his budget busters savings account.

    Then, when he had a high spending month, he could make a transfer back into his checking account to keep his cushion at $3,600. All while continuing to make his Later Money transfers every month.

    If you constantly run out of money before making your Later Money transfers, this method is not for you, yet.

    Always remember the goal of your Budget After Thinking is to generate fuel for your life goals. If you’re not making these Later Money transfers, you’ve defeated the purpose of having a budget in the first place.

    Don’t feel embarrassed or sad if that happens to you. Take it as a sign that you need to explore your Now Money and Life Money spending to see what adjustments you can make. Once you’ve found those adjustments, you can come right back to my version of zero-based budgeting.

    If you want this plan to work, where you only need to focus on two numbers instead of tracking every penny, you need to be honest with yourself that you’re ready for this.

    Decide for yourself what budgeting method works best for you.

    If you’ve been successful tracking your spending in a spreadsheet or a budgeting app, and enjoy the process, you should continue to do so. If it ain’t broke, don’t fix it, right?

    On the other hand, if you’ve created a Budget After Thinking and consistently hit your Later Money goals, you’re probably ready to stop tracking every penny, if you’d like.

    To recap, my version of zero-based budgeting is for those people who want to continue to fuel their Later Money goals without the anxiety of the spreadsheet. Instead, focus on those two numbers: (1) your checking account cushion and (2) your Later Money transfers. This is what I’ve been doing for years and it has worked.

    Happy boy with a bundle of money dollars cash who has a checking account cushion and Later Money.

    If your cushion falls short one month, that’s OK. We are not striving for perfection. Make up for it the next month or use your budget buster savings account to replenish your checking account. And, keep making your Later Money transfers.

    Has anyone else experienced mint.com anxiety? Are you currently using a budgeting app? How do you like it? Has any tried zero-based budgeting?

    Let us know in the comments below.

  • How to Make a Budget After Thinking

    How to Make a Budget After Thinking

    What would you do right now with $20,000.00?

    Imagine it’s a $20,000.00 bonus that was unexpectedly deposited into your checking account.

    No strings attached. It’s your money to do anything with.

    Answering this question should be fun.

    It’s a free $20,000.00!

    But, my guess is that if you thought seriously about it, you didn’t have much fun at all.

    Many of us likely struggled with what to do. We want to do the right thing, but we don’t know what that right thing is.

    Should we pay down debt?

    Should we invest?

    Take a vacation?

    Do nothing?

    Do you have a plan for where your next dollar is going?

    The reason we struggle with decisions like this is because most of us don’t have a plan for where our next dollar is going. What ends up happening is we do nothing.

    Our money hits our checking account, we spend it on this or that, and pretty soon that money has disappeared. We haven’t used the money to advance any of our priorities. It’s just gone.

    To me, this is one of the most important money mistakes that we need to fix right away. Having a plan for our money, before we earn it, is essential if we want to reach our goals.

    With a plan, we can eliminate the disappearing dollars with confidence that our money is being used to serve our purposes.

    And, that leads us to budgeting.

    Budgeting is having a plan for your next dollar before you earn it.

    Here, in Part 1 of our series on budgeting, we’re going to learn that the art of budgeting is having a plan for your next dollar before you earn it. That way, you avoid having disappearing dollars.

    We’ll learn how to create our baseline budget based off of our current personal situation. Wherever you currently are in life, you can then make adjustments to your spending based on what you truly want.

    In Part 2 of our series on budgeting, we’ll use a real life example to work through the budgeting process together. Through this example, you’ll see how even seemingly minor adjustments can make a big impact to your budget.

    In Part 3, we’ll take a deep dive into my top 10 strategies for making thoughtful adjustments to our budgets so we can add more fuel to our financial and life goals.

    In the end, I’ll show you how to use the information you’ve learned about yourself to create a lasting money plan that does not require you to track every penny.

    What I mean is that if you can practice these budgeting tips for just a little while, you actually won’t need to budget anymore.

    That’s when thinking and talking about money starts to be a lot of fun.

    Let’s dive in.

    Budgeting is about having a plan ahead of time.

    The art of budgeting is to know what you want to do with your money before it hits your checking account.

    Otherwise, it’s too late. Those dollars will disappear.

    In fact, the word “budget” is synonymous with “plan”.

    How do you come up with a plan?

    I teach my students that to create a budget, you need to first study your own personal situation to figure out where your dollars are currently going.

    Then, you can figure out a plan for how to use your next dollar before you earn it. This applies not just to bonuses or other unexpected dollars, it applies to every dollar you earn.

    When you put the time in to study your own habits, you can then create a realistic budget. When you have a realistic budget, you will have confidence that your dollars are working for you.

    Some dollars will be used to pay your ordinary life expenses, some dollars will be used for all the things in life you love, and some dollars will go to your financial goals.

    That’s all there is to it.

    Let’s take a look at three steps to take when first creating a budget.

    Step 1: Track your spending for at least 3 months.

    I recommend everyone, regardless of where you are in life, start with this first step of tracking your spending for at least three months.

    Without knowing where your money is currently going, you won’t be able to think about adjustments.

    I won’t lie to you. This step can be hard and you probably won’t like it. This is the step that makes people think budgeting is a nasty word. I get it and don’t blame you for having that reaction.

    Still, there’s no getting around this first step. Remember, you don’t have to budget forever, just long enough to learn your own behaviors towards money.

    Please know that many of us struggle with this first step. You might not like what you learn by tracking your spending.

    When I first started budgeting, I learned that I was $20,000.00 in debt and was spending way more than I earned.

    That wasn’t fun, but I’m happy that I put in the effort to find my blindspots and make adjustments.

    I often think to myself, “Where would I be today if I didn’t go through this process 15 years ago? How much further into debt would I have fallen?”

    Talk to your people as you go through the budgeting process.

    One last thing, budgeting is one of those areas where it can really help to talk with our people along the way for support and encouragement.

    You don’t have to budget in secret. We’re all in this together. Put the mental energy into this step, so you can stop wasting mental energy worrying about money and start getting energized thinking about money.

    In Part 2 of our budgeting series, we’ll talk about the different ways you can track your spending. I’ve used apps, spreadsheets, and even the notes function on my phone.

    The good news is, tracking your spending is easier today than it’s ever been.

    Regardless of how you track your spending, be honest with yourself. If you intentionally or mistakenly leave out certain expenditures, you won’t learn where your money is actually going.

    A budget, which is just a plan, is only as good as the data it’s built off of. Be honest about your data.

    One quick note: Budgets are usually done monthly, so you’ll want to create a separate accounting for each month you tracked.

    The reason we track three months of spending is so you’ll be able to identify any patterns or inconsistencies in your spending from month-to-month.

    This helps ensure you’re making decisions based off the best data possible.

    Step 2: Separate your spending into three three main categories.

    Great work completing the first step! That wasn’t easy, but you did it.

    Now that you have tracked your spending for three months, you can assign each expense into separate categories.

    Most personal finance experts agree, though we have different names for each category, that you should divide your money into three main buckets.

    I refer to these buckets as:

    1. Now Money
    2. Life Money
    3. Later Money

    1. Now Money

    Now Money is what you need to pay for basic life expenses.

    These expenses include housing, transportation, groceries, utilities (like internet and electricity), household goods (like toilet paper), and insurance.

    These are expenses that you can’t avoid and should be relatively fixed each month.

    2. Life Money

    Life Money is what you are going to spend every month on things and experiences in life that you love.

    This bucket includes dining out, concerts, vacations, subscriptions, gifts, and anything else that brings you joy.

    We can’t be afraid to spend this money. This bucket is usually what makes life fun and exciting.

    The key is to think and talk so you are spending this money consistently on things that matter to you.

    3. Later Money

    Later Money is what you are saving, investing, or using to pay off debt.

    This bucket includes long term goals, such as retirement plan contributions (like a 401k or Roth IRA), college savings for your kids (like a 529 plan), emergency savings and paying off student loan or credit card debt.

    This bucket also includes any shorter term goals, like saving for a wedding or a downpayment for a house.

    Most fun of all, this bucket includes any investments you make to more quickly grow your wealth, like investing in real estate or the stock market.

    You’ve probably guessed it already. Later Money is the key category that fuels your ultimate life goals, like financial independence.

    The more you fuel this category, the faster you can reach your goals.

    Don’t worry about assigning a percentage to each category.

    I have intentionally not recommended target amounts or percentages to allocate to each of your three categories.

    The reason is because of what I’ve learned from my students over the years. I’ll lay out my full reasoning in a separate post.

    The short version is that in my experience working with law students, assigning target percentages for each category is counterproductive.

    When I used to teach my students to aim for certain percentages in each category, I could tell that they would get discouraged as soon as I put the numbers on the slideshow. I completely understand why.

    Each of us is starting in a different place. If you are currently spending 80% of your monthly income on Now Money, it’s not helpful to have someone tell you to create a budget that automatically drops that level to 50%.

    My students would tune me out as soon as I put those numbers on the board.

    Now, I teach my students to think and talk about their current personal realities and aim for steady and lasting improvements.

    I want my students to create a plan that will last, not an unrealistic plan that they give up on after a few months.

    So, whatever amount you’re currently spending in each bucket, that’s what we’re going to work with as we move on to step 3.

    One other thing before you move on to step 3: don’t get hung up stressing about what type of expense goes into each category.

    Sometimes, it gets tricky. Do clothes you buy for work count as Now Money or Life Money?

    Don’t stress. It doesn’t really matter. It’s not worth the mental energy thinking about it. Just stay consistent and move on.

    If you still want a target, aim for 20% of your income added to your Later Money each month.

    All that said, I know that some of us operate better if we have a specific target in mind. If that’s you, the conventional wisdom is to aim for 20% of your income added to your Later Money each month.

    Targeting 20% savings each month was popularized in Elizabeth Warren’s book, All Your Worth: The Ultimate Lifetime Money Plan, first published in 2005 (before she was Senator Warren, she was a law professor and author).

    Senator Warren advocated for a 50-30-20 budget framework with 50% going to fixed costs (what I call “Now Money”), 30% going to wants (“Life Money”), and 20% going to financial goals (“Later Money”).

    Most personal finance experts agree that the 50-30-20 framework is a solid plan for your budget.

    In theory, I agree.

    In reality, I’ve become convinced through working with my law students that the 50-30-20 framework does not cut it in today’s environment. Like me, some experts have also recognized a 60-30-10 framework may be more appropriate today.

    While I agree the 60-30-10 framework is more realistic, my experience has taught me that assigning rigid percentages is just not a practical framework for most people at the beginning of budgeting process.

    Step 3: Make adjustments so your spending better aligns with your true motivations and desires in life.

    OK, so now that you have assigned your spending to each of the three categories, the next step is to think and talk about your current habits and whether you’re spending matches your true motivations and desires in life.

    If you decide that your spending does not match your life values, then it’s time to make some adjustments. What kind of adjustments?

    We’ll talk much more about how to make those adjustments in Part 2 of our budgeting series.

    In essence, my budgeting philosophy is to aim for steady and lasting improvements based on your current reality and your ultimate motivations. What does that mean?

    Your budget is really just about finding fuel for the best things in life.

    small tree growing with sunshine in garden like small money choices before big.

    This is where we circle back to the importance of having a clear understanding of what we want out of our money. Money is a tool. Ask yourself:

    “Is your current spending aligned with how you want to use your money to fuel your goals and ambitions?”

    If not, you can make incremental adjustments as you progress towards your ideal spending alignment.

    The idea will be to continuously add more fuel to our Life Money and Later Money, the buckets that represent the things we love the most (Life Money) and our most important life goals (Later Money).

    You can make small adjustments, which are usually easier and faster to put in place. These adjustments might include dining out a bit less, cutting out a concert, or cancelling a gym membership or subscription you don’t use.

    You can also make big adjustments, like moving to a cheaper part of town or getting rid of you car.

    Small or big, the key is that when you make these adjustments, you repurpose that money in a thoughtful and intentional way. You’re now starting to align your budget with your money motivations.

    With each thoughtful decision, you’re progressing towards your best money life. Most importantly, you’re learning about yourself and developing lasting habits. You won’t get discouraged and give up on budgeting.

    As we wrap up Part 1 in our budgeting series, keep the three initial steps in mind.

    • Step 1: Track your spending for at least 3 months.
    • Step 2: Separate your spending into 3 main categories.
    • Step 3: Make adjustments so your spending better aligns with your true motivations and desires in life.

    As you start to implement these steps, you’ll start to have a clearer picture of how your money can work for you.

    And, the next time you’re asked what you would do with $20,000.00, you’ll know the answer ahead of time because you have a plan in place.

    Answering the $20,000.00 question will be fun. No more anxiety-inducing, disappearing dollars.

  • You Should Want to be Good with Money

    You Should Want to be Good with Money

    So far, we’ve talked about why we need to think about money, why we need to talk about money, and Italian beef. Before we dive deep into budgeting, saving, paying off debt, and investing, we need to make sure our money mindset is locked in.

    I hope you’ve started thinking about why you want to be good with money. This will be personal for all of us and may change with time. The more you think and talk about why you want to be good with money, the clearer your motivations will become.

    Three powerful reasons why I want to be good with money:

    1. Money can give you choices.
    2. Money can give you personal power.
    3. Money can give you time.

    1. Money can give you choices.

    This may seem obvious, but when you have money, you have choices. You can choose where to live. You can choose who you work for, or can work for yourself. You can choose how you eat, exercise, relax, and travel.

    This holds true whether you make $50,000 or $250,000. Of course, your options may be different. The point is that when you’ve made good money choices, you’ll at least have options.

    2. Money can give you personal power.

    This is another way to say that money gives you control of your life situation. If you are in a bad relationship, a bad job, or just need a change, money gives you the personal power to do something about it.

    3. Money can give you time.

    When you have enough money to be truly financially independent, you have earned the freedom to do whatever you want with your time. You can spend your working hours at a job that is meaningful to you. You can spend more time with people who are meaningful to you.

    It’s been said many times, “time is our most precious resource.” When you have money, you can buy your time back.

    an hour glass running empty can be fixed because money gives you time back
    Photo by Aron Visuals on Unsplash

    The most important part of talking is listening.

    From the time we’re in diapers, we start learning by observing people older than us. As my family prepares to leave the house, my son has recently started chanting “Let’s roll! Let’s roll! Let’s roll!” Yup, that one’s on me.

    The same idea applies when it comes to life and money. I’ve mentioned before how much I’ve learned about life from listening to my clients suffering with mesothelioma. I’ve learned even more by listening to my family, friends, and mentors.

    When you listen to enough people with more years behind them than you, certain themes continue to surface, like the importance of family. You’ll hear about creating experiences and memories, usually involving vacations or time with friends.

    One thing I’ve never heard? Someone saying “I wish I spent less money on doing the things I loved.”

    You don’t have to agree with everything you hear, but the act of listening will start turning the wheels in your own mind. And when your wheels start turning, you can’t be afraid to spend money on the things that make you happy.

    Why do we need to actively think about the things that make us happy?

    A sneak peak of how I look at budgeting.

    I said we weren’t going to discuss budgeting yet, and we won’t. “Budgeting” is kind of a nasty word. Nobody likes to say it out loud, let alone aggressively do it each month. This is why we spend so much time in the beginning talking about our money mindset.

    A budget is worthless if you are not motivated to stick to it. Sure, you may stick to your budget plan for a month or two, but you’ll fall back into old habits if you haven’t prioritized what matters most to you.

    We’ll save the particulars for another day. A sneak peak at how I teach my students:

    Like it or not, everyone needs a budget… for a little while. Once we’ve identified what we spend money on and made some thoughtful choices, most of us don’t need a rigid budget.

    If you’ve thought and talked enough about your true motivations, you won’t need a budget either. Each month, you will take care of your obligations, grow your net worth, and use the rest of your money to buy things you love and to create experiences.

    Talking money should be emotional.

    If you’re being honest with yourself, talking money should be emotional. Remember, most of us exert mental energy pretending we’re not worried about money. My challenge to you is to exert that same energy into figuring out why we behave in certain ways when it comes to money.

    The reason it matters is because we’re soon going to be talking in detail about budgeting, which is just the process of making thoughtful choices about how we spend our money. If we don’t know why we choose to spend in certain ways, we won’t be able to make lasting adjustments to our budget.

    Have you ever thought about why you dine out?

    people sitting beside brown wooden table thinking and talking about if this was money well spent.
    Photo by Kevin Curtis on Unsplash

    Let’s look at an example to start prepping ourselves for the budgeting process. This is a good time to revisit one of the main principles when talking money with your people: no judgments allowed. We’re not looking to shame ourselves or each other. We are aiming for understanding so we can make thoughtful decisions.

    Say you’ve looked at your monthly spending and realize that you’re spending a lot of money dining out. The key to creating a budget you will actually stick to is actively thinking about why you spend so much money dining out. You might learn that dining out is an essential part of your best life. You might learn it’s really not.

    Ask yourself these questions:

    Is there an emotional reason you dine out frequently, like it makes you feel successful? Or, you like spending time with friends? Do you get joy out of trying new dishes?

    Maybe it’s something else entirely and unrelated to your emotions. Maybe you don’t have time to cook at home because of your work schedule? Maybe it’s just laziness?

    It might have nothing to do with how often you eat out, but where you choose to eat and what you choose to order. Do you order a bottle of wine with dinner? Could you have drinks at home beforehand instead?

    When you honestly think about and answer these questions for yourself, you can start to make thoughtful decisions on whether that spending matches your priorities. If it doesn’t, then it’s an area for adjustment.

    And, that’s really all that budgeting is. Not so nasty, right?

  • A New Financial Freedom Blog for Lawyers and Professionals

    A New Financial Freedom Blog for Lawyers and Professionals

    I named my financial freedom blog “Think and Talk Money” because most of us don’t do enough of either. 

    I believe we can make it easier on ourselves to make consistent, good money choices if we just spent a little time each week thinking and talking about money.

    Wouldn’t most of us agree that doing new things, and especially doing hard things, is easier when we have a partner?

    Someone to bounce ideas off. And, someone to keep us accountable. Or, someone to pick us up when we aren’t at our best.

    Have you ever talked about money or read a financial freedom blog?

    Who is the person that knows the most about you?

    Your best friend? Significant other? Brother or sister?

    This person knows your most embarrassing stories. She has seen you cry. She has been there for you through thick and thin.

    But, have you ever talked to this person about money?

    Have you ever shared what drives you to wake up at 6 a.m. for work?

    Have you mentioned that you’re worried about how you’re going to pay off debt?

    Or, have you ever talked about how you’d like to use money as a tool build your life on your terms?

    Two friends talking about the financial freedom blog, Think and Talk Money.

    You might be surprised how powerful these conversations can be. It’s likely the person you’re talking to will be relieved you started the conversation.

    If you don’t know where to begin with conversations like this, a financial freedom blog is a good place to start.

    I didn’t read a financial freedom blog or talk about money in 2010.

    I certainly didn’t think to have conversations about money in 2010 when I fell deeper and deeper into debt.

    Maybe that’s why I still remember the day so clearly when I realized I was financially heading in the wrong direction.

    It was an ordinary Monday. I had grabbed my mail on the way out the door as I headed to my job at the courthouse.

    When I got to my desk, I opened my credit card statement and was stunned by what I saw. $20,000 owed ($30,000 in today’s dollars) one year into my career.  

    I was ashamed. I was supposed to be smart. Responsible. Trustworthy.

    How could I be so foolish?

    Looking back, I wonder if I would have had these feelings for so long if I had read a financial freedom blog. Or, what if I was more willing to discuss my money choices with the people I trusted?

    I likely would have saved myself a lot of worry, frustration, and time if I hadn’t struggled alone. Perhaps I would have learned that so many others were struggling with consumer debt like I was.

    I made it harder on myself by not talking.

    I unnecessarily did it the hard way, but I figured it out. Right then and there, I made it a priority to turn things around.

    At the time, I didn’t know the solution. But, I had been trained to do research so I could find answers to hard questions. So, that’s what I did.

    Along the way, I realized that the fundamental and basic personal finance principles are, well, basic. George S. Clason wrote “The Richest Man in Babylon” nearly a century ago. His collection of parables set in ancient Babylon is legendary.

    Everyone should read it. His advice is simple and excellent: spend less than you earn. Save. Invest. The same fundamentals are as true today as they were then. 

    Easy, right? 

    Not exactly.

    Money is about continuous choices.

    Money is about continuous mindset and choices. The basic concepts are easy enough to understand. Consistently making good choices is hard.

    Even as I was racking up credit card debt, I could have aced a quiz that asked, “Is it a good idea to spend more money than you earn every month and plummet deeper and deeper into debt?” 

    For some reason, though, most of us choose to deal with money on our own. I’d like to change that with my financial freedom blog.  There’s a stigma that we shouldn’t talk about money. I’d like to change that, too. 

    Get comfortable talking about money.

    I want us to get comfortable with the idea of going to our friends and loved ones to talk about money, just as we would talk about anything else. There should be no embarrassment or shame in it. We’re all dealing with the same challenges.

    Woman in woollen socks by the fireplace after being comfortable with money by visiting financial freedom blog, Think and Talk Money.

    By talking about money, we can help each other turn those challenges into opportunities. If we can alleviate our money stress, perhaps we can reverse the trend of lower happiness levels among young people today.

    Talking about money is not about numbers.

    We’ll have plenty more to say about how to talk money in this financial freedom blog. For now, let’s agree that talking about money is not about prying into how many dollars we each have in the bank.

    We can benefit by talking about our money mindset, habits, and strategies, while still keeping certain information private.

    Let’s also agree that talking money is a “no judgment” endeavor.

    We have all had different experiences that have shaped our relationship with money. It’s important not to pass judgment, especially when talking to our significant others. Your conversation won’t last very long if you ignore this advice.

    Each session I’m with my students, I learn from their experiences and money mindset, same as they learn from mine. I encourage them to continue the conversation outside the classroom with their loves ones.

    When my students report back, they tell me how empowered they felt after starting these conversations. The more we can talk money, the less we’ll feel alone. We’ll all make better choices because of it.

    What topics will we cover in this financial freedom blog?

    In this financial freedom blog, we’ll talk about the importance of money mindset and why you should want to be good with money. Money mindset touches every aspect of personal finance, so it’s a theme we’ll keep returning to.

    I didn’t realize the power of money mindset until I wrote down my Tiara Goals for financial independence on a beach in 2017.

    We’ll talk about personal finance fundamentals, like eliminating disappearing dollars with a Budget After Thinking.

    While very few people enjoy the budgeting process, it’s a crucial first step to generate fuel for our savings and investments, which ultimately fund our major life goals.

    In addition to budgeting, saving, and investing, we’ll learn how to responsibly use debt and why credit is important.

    We’ll spend a lot of time discussing real estate investing, one of my favorite ways to achieve financial freedom.

    Along the way, you’ll hear me regularly share one of my core beliefs:

    Talking about money is not taboo.

    There’s no reason to embark on your journey to financial freedom alone. Share your accomplishments and struggles with your friends and loved ones. You’ll only be better off for it.

    I certainly will be doing that with my financial freedom blog.

    Please share in the comments below if you’ve ever benefited from talking about money with a friend or loved one.

    Don’t forget to subscribe to our email list for all the latest!

    2 responses to “A New Financial Freedom Blog for Lawyers and Professionals”

    1. Kevin Avatar
      Kevin

      I’ve been learning from Prof. Adair for the past decade. Not only that, I’ve followed his advice, and it is one of the reasons I am financially independent today. I could not be more excited for this website – there’s so much more left to learn!

      Reply
      1. Matthew Adair Avatar
        Matthew Adair

        Love our chats about life and money, Kev! I’m always looking forward to our next conversation!

        Reply

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *